home
***
CD-ROM
|
disk
|
FTP
|
other
***
search
/
World of Ham Radio 1997
/
WOHR97_AmSoft_(1997-02-01).iso
/
packet
/
lan_link
/
amsoft.iii
next >
Wrap
Text File
|
1997-02-01
|
452KB
|
11,313 lines
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 1
_______
____|__ | (tm)
--| | |-------------------
| ____|__ | Association of
| | |_| Shareware
|__| o | Professionals
-----| | |---------------------
|___|___| MEMBER
Before you print the file, you can get a copy in Wordperfect 5.1
format with tables and figures. See Appendix 12.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 2
Table of Contents
Introducing LAN-LINK ...................................1
Appendix 1 Features of LAN-LINK ........................2
LAN-LINK PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS ............................3
Getting Started ........................................6
Bringing LAN-LINK Up the First Time ....................7
Using the Quick Menu ...................................8
Connecting to Other Stations ...........................8
Using Different TNCs ...................................8
LAN-LINK Memory Requirements ...........................9
PC to TNC Communications ...............................9
LAN-LINK Runs Open Loop ................................9
In Case of Problems ....................................9
Logbooks ...............................................9
How To Get an Update ...................................10
Starting LAN-LINK in a Non Packet Mode ................10
Using LAN-LINK with a PacketCluster ...................10
Simulating a PacketCluster with LAN-LINK ..............12
Using ANSI Color for Transmitting Text Color Files ....12
Appendix 2 LAN-LINK Features, Menus and Commands ......14
1.0 LAN-LINK MESSAGE HANDLING FEATURES ................14
1.1 Answering Machine ................................14
1.2 Mail Beacon (Annunciator) ........................14
1.3 How to Leave a Message ...........................15
2.0 LAN-LINK WINDOWS ..................................16
3.0 HOT KEYS ..........................................20
3.1 Alt-3 Change Foreground Color ....................20
3.2 Alt-4 Change Background Color ....................21
3.3 Alt-A Alert Call (Packet) and AMTOR ARQ Call/Talk.21
3.4 Alt-B Send Break/AMTOR Changeover ................21
3.5 Alt-C Call/Connect to Someone ....................21
3.6 Alt-D Disconnect or Receive ......................22
3.7 Alt-E Enter Call .................................22
3.8 Alt-F Flush TNC Buffer ...........................22
3.9 Alt-G Grab Call and Frequency from
DX Alert Message ................................23
3.10 Alt-H Help Information for Function Keys ........23
3.11 Alt-J Jump to DOS ...............................23
3.12 Alt-K PacketCluster DX Alert ....................23
3.13 Alt-L Log Contact ...............................23
3.14 Alt-M Message Scan ..............................23
3.15 Alt-N Next Stream ...............................23
3.16 Alt-O Turn Robot ON .............................24
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 3
3.17 Alt-P Turn Printer ON/OFF .......................24
3.18 Alt-Q Call QRZ ..................................24
3.19 Alt-R Retry Call/Connect ........................24
3.20 Alt-S Scan Log ..................................24
3.21 Alt-W :QRA: .....................................24
3.22 Alt-X Exit to DOS ...............................24
3.23 Alt-Y Zap PacketCluster/RTTY Transmit "RY"s .....25
3.24 Alt-Z Zap PBBS ..................................25
3.25 Alt-= Toggle Miscellaneous Flag .................27
3.26 End "> +?" [Over] ...............................27
3.27 PgUp Scrollback (Scrolls back incoming text) ....27
3.28 The Home Key ....................................28
3.29 The Down Arrow Key ..............................28
3.30 Shift/Baudrate Control Keys .....................28
3.31 Control T (^T) ..................................29
3.32 Control-Z (^Z) ..................................29
3.33 Alt-T Talk to another station connected to
the PacketCluster ................29
4.0 FUNCTION KEYS .....................................30
4.1 Capture to Disk Toggle (F1) ......................30
4.2 Send Brag Tape and Talk (F2) .....................30
4.3 Transmit Callsign Sequence (F3) ..................31
4.4 Send Brag Tape (F4) ..............................31
4.5 Show Packet "MH" list and Point and
Shoot Connect (F5) ..........31
4.6 Auto CQ Call (F6) ................................31
4.7 Activate Type Ahead Buffer/AMTOR Relink (F7) .....32
4.8 Disconnect, Disengage or Receive (F8) ............33
4.9 Put TNC in CMD Mode (F9) .........................33
4.10 Put TNC in CONVERSE/Transmit/AMTOR FEC (F10) ....34
4.11 Alternate Function Keys .........................34
4.12 Shift Function Keys .............................34
4.13 Control Function Keys ...........................35
5.0 THE MAIN MENU .....................................36
5.1 The Quick Menu ...................................36
5.2 Auto CQ ..........................................37
5.3 Send Brag Tape ...................................37
5.4 Call Someone .....................................37
5.5 initialize TNC ...................................37
5.6 Log Menu .........................................37
5.7 Change Communications Mode .......................37
5.8 Call CQ ..........................................37
5.9 Send/Talk File ...................................37
5.10 QRZ .............................................37
5.11 Send/Talk LAN-LINK files 001..010 ...............38
6.0 THE PBBS/PacketCluster MENU .......................39
6.1 Download Text Files ..............................39
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 4
6.2 Download Binary File (Xmodem) ....................39
6.3 Download Binary File (Ymodem) ....................40
6.4 Zap PacketCluster ................................40
6.5 Zap PBBS .........................................40
6.6 Turn PacketCluster Mode ON/OFF ...................40
6.7 Send DX Alert Message ............................40
6.8 Clear All Search Flags ...........................41
6.9 Set All Search Flags .............................41
6.10 Set All CW Search Flags .........................41
6.11 Set All SSB Search Flags ........................41
6.12 Set/Clear Individual Band Search Flags ..........41
6.13 Set/Clear Current Band Search Flags .............41
6.14 Turn Auto Cluster DX Alert ON/OFF ...............41
6.15 Send DX Alert ...................................42
6.16 Send Announcement
(connected to a PacketCluster and using a
dual port TNC) ........................42
6.17 Talk to Station
(connected to a PacketCluster and using a
dual port TNC) ........................42
6.18 Set Current Band Search Flags ONLY ..............42
7.0 THE CALL MENU .....................................43
7.1 Alert Call .......................................43
7.2 ReMember Path ....................................44
7.3 Call CQ ..........................................44
7.4 Show Contents of Call Directory ..................44
7.5 Target Call ......................................44
7.6 Auto CQ ..........................................45
7.7 Toggle DX Flag ...................................45
7.8 Zap PBBS on Next Mail Beacon .....................45
7.9 Turn CQ File ON/OFF ..............................45
8.0 EDIT MENU .........................................46
8.1 Edit Brag Tape ...................................48
8.2 Edit Call Directory File .........................48
8.3 Edit Any Other File ..............................48
8.4 Answer Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File
(Split Screen) .........48
8.5 Answer Incoming Messages (Split Screen) ..........49
8.6 Leave Note for Someone ...........................49
8.7 Edit Capture-to-Disk file ........................49
8.8 Edit Two Files (Split Screen) ....................49
8.9 Edit Configuration file ..........................49
8.10 Edit LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 files ....49
8.11 Pick Capture-to-disk File to Edit ...............50
8.12 Pick Message file to Edit .......................50
8.13 Leave Messages on your local PBBS ...............50
8.14 Edit Incoming Message ...........................50
8.15 Edit LAN-LINK.OUT File ..........................50
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 5
8.16 Edit LAN-LINK.DMO File ..........................50
8.17 Pick dEmo File to Edit ..........................50
8.18 Edit CQ File ....................................50
9.0 EVENT/CLOCK MENU ..................................51
9.1 Set Alarm ........................................51
9.2 Connect ..........................................51
9.3 Display Event ....................................51
9.4 Periodic Event ...................................51
9.5 Turn Robot ON/OFF ................................51
9.6 Turn Automatic Contester ON/OFF ..................52
9.7 Turn Time Display ON/OFF .........................52
9.8 Cancel Event .....................................52
9.9 Zap PBBS .........................................52
10.0 FILES MENU .......................................53
10.1 Send Brag Tape ..................................53
10.2 File Directory ..................................54
10.3 Erase File ......................................54
10.4 Pick Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File to View .......54
10.5 Rename File .....................................54
10.6 Send File .......................................54
10.7 Send/Talk File ..................................54
10.8 Send Uppercase File .............................54
10.9 View file .......................................54
10.10 View Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File ..............54
10.11 View Incoming Message File .....................55
10.12 Print File .....................................55
10.13 View Color File ................................55
10.14 Turn Mode Files ON/OFF .........................55
10.15 Turn Expand Files ON/OFF .......................55
11.0 HELP WITH FUNCTION KEYS ..........................56
12.0 JUMP TO DOS SHELL ................................56
13.0 LAN-LINK MENU ....................................57
13.1 :QBU: External Protocol Command .................57
13.2 :QBM: ASCII File ................................58
13.3 :QSM: Message ...................................58
13.4 :QSP: Message ...................................58
13.5 :QDB: ASCII File ................................58
13.6 :QRU: Messages ..................................59
13.7 :QTA: Messages ..................................59
13.8 :QZD: Binary Files ..............................59
13.9 :QZU: Binary Files ..............................60
13.10 :QIC: Page Operator ............................60
13.11 :QMH: Monitor Heard ............................60
13.12 :QTR: Ask for Time .............................60
13.13 :QRA: Who is "ON-LINE" .........................60
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 6
13.14 Demo Mode ......................................60
13.15 Set Single/Dual PK-900/DSP 2232 In Windows .....61
13.16 Switch IN Windows (Dual port TNC only) .........61
14.0 LOG MENU .........................................62
14.1 Append From Another LAN-LINK Log ................64
14.2 Scan Log by Band ................................64
14.3 Change Logbook File .............................64
14.4 Delete Logbook File .............................64
14.5 Find Date .......................................64
14.6 Purge Log .......................................64
14.7 Help Function Keys ..............................64
14.8 Import From G3ZCZ's Contest Log .................64
14.9 Jump to an Entry ................................65
14.10 Pick a Log file ................................65
14.11 Pack a Logbook .................................65
14.12 Scan Log by Mode ...............................65
14.13 Create a New Logbook ...........................65
14.14 Print Log ......................................65
14.15 Re-index a Logbook .............................65
14.16 Sort on Date + Time ............................65
14.17 Turn Update Disk ON/OFF ........................65
14.18 Fuzzy Scan .....................................66
14.19 Turn Secondary Search ON/OFF ...................66
14.20 Log Menu Function Keys .........................66
14.21 QSL Menu .......................................69
15.0 MESSAGE MENU .....................................71
15.1 PBBS Command Files ..............................71
15.2 Current Messages ................................71
15.3 View Message ....................................71
15.4 Leave Note ......................................71
15.5 Old Messages ....................................71
15.6 Time Tag ........................................72
16.0 TNC MENU .........................................73
16.1 Set TNC Date/Time ...............................73
16.2 Flush TNC Buffer ................................74
16.3 Initialize TNC ..................................74
16.4 Show Calls Monitored List .......................74
16.5 Show Connect Status .............................74
16.6 Change CTEXT ....................................75
16.7 Activate TNC Mailbox ............................75
16.8 Deactivate TNC Mailbox ..........................75
17.0 AMSAT-OSCAR MENU .................................76
17.1 Full Duplex ON/OFF ..............................76
17.2 SAREX MENU ......................................76
17.3 SAREX Orbiter Features ..........................78
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 7
18.0 PARAMETER MENU ...................................81
18.1 Turn Beacon Mode ON/OFF .........................81
18.2 Clear Connect Counter ...........................82
18.3 TNC Custom Line .................................82
18.4 Turn LAN-LINK Beacon Control ON/OFF .............84
18.5 Turn Command Echo ON/OFF ........................85
18.6 Change Keyboard Beep Count ......................85
18.7 Set Message Count ...............................85
18.8 Turn Node Drop Link ON/OFF ......................85
18.9 Turn Printer ON/OFF .............................85
18.10 Turn QTC Snatch ON/OFF .........................86
18.11 Turn :QSP: Relay Flag ON/OFF ...................87
18.12 Turn Sound ON/OFF ..............................87
18.13 Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF .......................87
18.14 Turn DCD Flag ON/OFF ...........................88
18.15 Turn PBBS Snatch ON/OFF ........................89
18.16 Turn Time Id. ON/OFF ...........................89
18.17 Turn Automatic Capture-to-Disk Flag ON/OFF .....89
18.18 Change PBBS Parameters .........................89
18.19 Change Callsigns ...............................91
18.20 Change Directories .............................92
18.21 Enter Common Calls .............................92
18.22 Change File Names ..............................92
18.23 Change LAN-LINK Parameters .....................93
18.24 Change PC Communications Parameters ............96
18.25 Change Colors ..................................98
18.26 Change SAREX Parameters .......................101
18.27 Update Configuration File .....................101
18.28 Verify Changes ................................101
18.29 Change Scan Words .............................101
18.30 Turn Miscellaneous Flag ON/OFF ................102
18.31 Change Band/Mode ..............................103
18.32 Zap PBBS on Next Mail Beacon ..................103
18.33 PBBS Zap, Don't Disconnect After Sequence .....103
18.34 Turn Auto Answer ON/OFF .......................104
19.0 Q Codes [NC/L] ..................................104
20.0 COMMUNICATIONS MODES ............................105
20.1 VHF PACKET .....................................105
20.2 HF PACKET ......................................105
20.3 ASCII (RTTY) ...................................105
20.4 BAUDOT (RTTY) ..................................105
20.5 MORSE (CW) .....................................105
20.6 AMTOR (STANDBY) ................................106
20.7 AMTOR (MONITOR) ................................106
20.8 PACTOR (STANDBY) ...............................106
20.9 PACTOR (MONITOR) ...............................106
20.10 SIGNAL ........................................106
20.11 NAVTEX ........................................107
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 8
20.12 G-TOR .........................................107
20.13 Manual ........................................107
21.0 TERMINAL MODE MENU ..............................108
21.1 Packet Terminal Menu ...........................108
21.2 AMTOR Terminal Menu ............................112
21.3 Baudot Terminal Menu ...........................113
21.4 ASCII Terminal Menu ............................115
21.5 CW Menu ........................................116
21.6 Pactor Terminal Menu ...........................117
22.0 EXIT TO DOS .....................................119
23.0 THE ELMER MENU ..................................120
23.1 Change ELMER File ..............................120
23.2 Turn ELMER ON/OFF ..............................120
23.3 Load State Table (ELMER.QSO) ...................120
23.4 Pick File to Edit ..............................120
23.5 Edit State Table (ELMER.QSO) ...................120
23.6 Show State Table ...............................120
24.0 RADIO MENU ......................................122
24.1 Select VFO A/B .................................122
24.2 Set Radio Mode .................................122
24.3 Turn Flag QSY ON/OFF or N/A ....................122
24.4 Read VFO Frequency .............................122
24.5 Set VFO Frequency ..............................122
24.6 Speak VFO Frequency ............................122
Appendix 3 LAN-LINK Disk Files .......................124
1.0 LAN-LINK.EXE .....................................124
2.0 LAN-LINK.SYS .....................................124
2.1 CTEXT Line ......................................127
2.2 ELMER Flag ......................................127
2.3 PC Port 4 Custom Address ........................127
2.4 PC Port 4 Custom IRQ ............................127
2.5 VHF Stream Switch Character .....................127
2.6 HF Stream Switch Character ......................128
2.7 TNC Error Message ...............................128
2.8 Connect Timeout Delay ...........................128
2.9 ELMER Configuration File ........................128
2.10 Expand Transmitted Files Flag ..................128
2.11 First PacketCluster Command ....................128
2.12 Second PacketCluster Command ...................128
2.13 TNC Mailbox ON Command .........................128
2.14 TNC Mailbox OFF Command ........................129
2.15 VHF Maxframe Command ...........................129
2.16 HF Maxframe Command ............................129
2.17 Inhibit VHF Logging Flag .......................129
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 9
2.18 Inhibit HF Logging Flag ........................129
2.19 Printer Permanent Flag .........................129
2.20 Log Disk Update Flag ...........................129
2.21 Secondary Log Flag .............................129
2.22 Auto Answer Flag ...............................129
2.23 Ctdsk File Disk Update Flag ....................130
2.24 Default CW Speed ...............................130
2.25 Secondary Logbook ..............................130
2.26 BBS List Command ...............................130
2.27 BBS List Mine Command ..........................130
2.28 BBS Custom Command .............................130
2.29 BBS Bye Command ................................130
2.30 Start Up Packet Terminal Mode ..................130
2.31 Page Time (:QIC: Seconds) ......................131
2.32 PacketCluster DX Alert Tone CW Dit time ........131
2.33 Packet Cluster DX Alert Tone CW Note ...........131
2.34 Mode File Flag .................................131
2.35 BAUDOT Color Change Text String ................131
2.36 Dual Window Flag ...............................131
2.37 TNC String for Modem 9600 baud .................131
2.38 TNC String for Modem 1200 baud .................131
2.39 TNC String for Modem RTTY ......................131
2.40 TNC String for Modem 300 baud ..................132
2.41 TNC String for Modem RTTY and 1200 baud ........132
2.42 TNC String for Modem 300 baud and 1200 baud ....132
2.43 TNC String for Modem Fuji ......................132
2.44 Delay after a command line .....................132
2.45 Radio Name .....................................132
2.46 Radio Port .....................................132
2.47 Radio Port baud rate ...........................132
2.48 Radio Port Data Bits ...........................132
2.49 Radio Port Stop Bits ...........................133
2.50 Radio Port Parity ..............................133
2.51 Radio Address ..................................133
2.52 Flag QSY .......................................133
2.53 Flag DX Alert Prefix Check .....................133
2.54 Band parameters for DX Alert message log search 133
2.55 Modes for DX Alert message log search ..........134
2.56 TNC Parameters .................................134
3.0 *.RUN ............................................134
4.0 *.DBF (HF.DBF and VHF.DBF) .......................134
5.0 LAN-LINK.DIR .....................................134
6.0 CONFIG.SYS .......................................135
7.0 *.MBX ............................................135
8.0 *.BBS ............................................136
9.0 LAN-LINK.001 - LAN-LINK.010 ......................137
10.0 QBU-RX.BAT ......................................137
11.0 QBU-TX.BAT ......................................137
12.0 LAN-LINK.QTA ....................................138
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 10
13.0 QZ*.BAT .........................................138
14.0 ELMER.QSO .......................................139
15.0 LAN-LINK.OUT ....................................139
16.0 *.DMO ...........................................139
17.0 *.CQ files ......................................139
Appendix 4 Local Area Network Capability .............140
1.0 LAN Protocol (G3ZCZ Version) .....................140
2.0 Message Format ...................................141
3.0 ASCII File Uploading/Downloading .................141
4.0 Path Determination to a DX station ...............142
5.0 Binary File Transfers ............................143
6.0 Requirements for Transfer Protocols ..............143
7.0 The Zmodem Protocol ..............................144
8.0 The PCZ Zmodem Package ...........................144
9.0 Basic NC/L Dictionary ............................145
9.1 :QBM: ...........................................145
9.2 :QDB: ...........................................145
9.3 :QMH: ...........................................146
9.4 :QSM: ...........................................146
9.5 :QSP: ...........................................146
9.6 :QRA: ...........................................146
9.7 :QRT: ...........................................146
9.8 :QRU: ...........................................146
9.9 :QNO: ...........................................147
9.10 :QJG: ..........................................147
9.11 :QRV: ..........................................147
9.12 :QSL: ..........................................147
9.13 :QTA: ..........................................147
9.14 :QTC: ..........................................147
9.15 :QBU: ..........................................147
9.16 :QZU: ..........................................148
9.17 :QZD: ..........................................148
9.18 :QIC: ..........................................148
9.19 :QTR: ..........................................148
Appendix 5 Using Different TNCs ......................149
1.0 TNC2 (MFJ 1270) ..................................149
2.0 TNC1 (HK-4040) ...................................149
3.0 Kantronics KPC-2 .................................149
4.0 Kantronics KAM ...................................150
5.0 PK-232 ...........................................150
6.0 MFJ 1278 .........................................150
7.0 Heath HK-21 ......................................151
8.0 PK-88 ............................................151
9.0 PK-900 and DSP-2232 ..............................151
Appendix 6 Anomalies and Bugs ........................152
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 11
1.0 Command/Converse Mode Anomalies ..................152
2.0 Buffer Messages in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode ..........152
3.0 FEC +? Responses in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode .........152
4.0 Using a Monochrome Monitor .......................152
5.0 The Packet Conference Mode .......................152
6.0 Packet Conference Mode Disconnects ...............153
7.0 Strange Events ...................................153
8.0 *** DISCONNECTED .................................153
9.0 *** CONNECTED ....................................153
10.0 Greek Characters and Other Garbage in the
Incoming Screen .................154
11.0 Dumb TNC ........................................154
12.0 Intermittent Lockup .............................154
13.0 Automatic Functions Don't Work ..................154
14.0 BBS Zap Failure .................................154
15.0 LAN-LINK Forgets the Band/Power Information .....155
16.0 Zmodem Binary Transfer Problems .................155
17.0 LAN-LINK 2.32 Snatch problem ....................155
18.0 Double colon after :QTC: ........................155
19.0 Logbook 601 errors ..............................155
20.0 KAM HF Packet Problem ...........................156
21.0 ASCII ANSI color transfers ......................156
Appendix 7 Updates, Revision History .................157
Appendix 8 ELMER: An Expert System Based on
a Finite State Machine ..........158
1.0 INTRODUCTION .....................................158
1.1 Expert Systems ..................................159
1.2 The User Interface ..............................159
1.3 The Knowledge Base ..............................159
1.4 The Inference Engine ............................159
1.5 Features of an Expert System ....................159
1.6 Using an Expert System ..........................160
1.7 The Semantic Network ............................160
1.8 A State Machine .................................160
1.9 The User Perception .............................160
1.10 ELMER ..........................................161
1.11 Responses to an Input ..........................161
1.12 Syntactic Analysis .............................162
1.13 Programming ELMER ..............................162
2.0 The State Table (ELMER.QSO) File .................162
2.1 The Directory Path to the ELMER Text Files ......162
2.2 The Start Up File ...............................162
2.3 Window Colors ...................................163
2.4 The ELMER Initial State .........................163
2.5 State Machine Parameters ........................163
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 12
2.6 The State Machine File ..........................164
2.7 Example of Programming the State Table ..........165
3.0 The Stand Alone Version Status Window ............166
4.0 The Stand Alone Menu .............................166
4.1 Edit Any File ...................................166
4.2 Load State Table (ELMER.QSO) ....................166
4.3 Pick File to Edit ...............................166
4.4 Edit State Table (ELMER.QSO) ....................166
4.5 eXit to DOS .....................................166
4.6 Show State Table ...............................167
Appendix 9 PCZ Binary file Transfers .................168
LEGEND ...............................................168
ZMODEM RECEIVE .......................................169
ZMODEM SEND ..........................................169
XMODEM VARIANTS ......................................170
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES ................................170
"PORT & IRQ" .........................................172
"Super_Z" (tm) .......................................172
NETWORK SUPPORT ......................................173
MENU FRONTEND ........................................173
PHONE SUPPORT ........................................173
The PCZ Menu Transfer System .........................174
Appendix 10 Other PC Software
by Joe Kasser, W3/G3ZCZ .........176
1.0 PC-HAM 3.52 .....................................176
1.1 LOGBOOK .........................................176
1.2 CONTEST .........................................176
1.3 CQSS ............................................176
1.4 WHATSON .........................................176
2.0 STARTREK The Computer Program ....................176
3.0 WHATS-UP 1.40 ....................................177
4.0 ELMER 1.00 .......................................178
Appendix 11 How Shareware Works ......................179
Appendix 12 LAN-LINK 2.34 REGISTRATION FORM ..........181
Index ................................................182
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 1
Introducing LAN-LINK
LAN-LINK is distributed as a Shareware product. You may freely copy
and share the product for non commercial use, with your friends,
associates and other radio amateurs. If you decide to use the
product, you are asked to become a registered user by completing the
registration form in Appendix 12, and sending it (or a copy), and
$45.00 or equivalent in foreign currency to the author (Mastercard
and Visa accepted). All checks should be drawn on US banks.
Canadians, please use postal money order. Upon receipt of your
registration, you will receive one free update disk, telephone and
mail (electronic and regular) support. If you are not satisfied with
the program after registering it, your money will be refunded no
questions asked, for up to 30 days from the date your registration
was acknowledged.
European Radio Amateur users may register (30.00 Pounds Sterling,
includes V.A.T.) and obtain support from Terry Dansey at ReadyCrest
Ltd., PO Box 75, Chatham, Kent, ME5 9DL, England. ReadyCrest Ltd.
accepts credit cards (Access, Visa, MasterCard and Eurocard).
Telephones: Voice 44 (0) 634-687168, FAX 44 (0)634-687178, Data
(BBS) 44 (0)634-200931.
LAN-LINK may not be sold or distributed with another product without
the express written permission of Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ. Joe Kasser,
G3ZCZ will only support unmodified copies of this software.
Potential Commercial Users please contact Joe Kasser directly for
modifications and/or details of Site licensing.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 2
Appendix 1 Features of LAN-LINK
LAN-LINK is a Personal Packet Terminal Program for the TNC1, TNC2,
KPC-2, PK-88 and, most of all, a smart multi-mode digital
communications controller for the KAM, MFJ1278, PK-900, DSP-2232 and
the PK-232. LAN-LINK is designed to optimize the configuration of
the TNC in each communications mode and to provide some smart
terminal features. It takes advantage of the extra features of the
PK-232 which is made by Advanced Electronics Applications Inc. It is
designed to allow anyone to use and get the most out of their packet
TNC as well as from the PK-232, the MFJ1278, and the KAM for Morse,
ASCII, BAUDOT, AMTOR as well as Packet Radio communications without
having to keep the manual handy.
LAN-LINK is a sophisticated program. In its basic state it allows
you to use the TNC in an optimal manner. It configures the TNC (it
types the commands) for you to maximize the communications
efficiency in the communications mode of your choice. That means,
for example, when working Packet on HF you need to program the TNC
parameters to different values than you would use on VHF to make
maximum use of the mode. One significant difference is the length of
the packet itself, for the longer it is, the greater the probability
of QRM destroying it. This program will adjust the packet parameters
for you.
Since the computer is now involved, other features have been added
to simplify operation, and several features have been automated. All
these operations are performed using menus and function keys as
documented below. It will take a while to learn how to use this
program in a manner which suits you. Read this document and have
fun. After all, isn't that one of the purposes of Amateur Radio.
The LAN-LINK manual is organized by menu. It describes the
operation of each menu option and function key in each
Communications Mode.
The manual tells you what LAN-LINK can do. It does not tell you how
to use LAN-LINK.
Any Terminal Node Controller (TNC) is a complex piece of equipment.
It can operate in a Command Mode, in which you tell it to do
something, or in a Converse Mode in which you are using it to talk
to other stations. Many people confuse the two when first getting on
Packet. If you monitor the channels you will recognize Command Mode
TNC instructions on the air, and when you use the TNC you will
receive the "error" reply when you type something thinking you are
in the Converse Mode but are really in the Command Mode. LAN-LINK is
designed to make Packet operation simple using Menus and high level
(Function and Hot key combinations) commands.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 3
Morse, ASCII, BAUDOT communications modes are HALF DUPLEX. One
station is transmitting at any time. You thus have to use the
Transmit-Converse and Receive-Disconnect function keys to turn the
transmitter on and off respectively.
AMTOR is also HALF DUPLEX but has some of the attributes of full
duplex. In this Mode you control who is talking through software.
Only one station can send data at a time, but you can type
characters in to the buffer and they will be transmitted
automatically when the other station turns the QSO over to you. Once
you have linked with someone, you do not use the Receive/Disconnect
function until the QSO is over.
Both stations are communicating automatically thanks to the TNC. If
you want the other operator to respond type the "+?" key sequence
(or use the "End" Key).
Packet Radio communications on the other hand is a full duplex mode
of communications. Once you have connected with someone, you do not
use the Receive-Disconnect function until the QSO is over.
Both stations are communicating automatically thanks to the TNC. If
you want the other operator to respond type the ">" key followed by
the "Enter" Key. Better yet, use the "End" Key.
Morse, AMTOR, ASCII and BAUDOT are character mode communications in
that each character you type is sent as you type them. In Packet
Communications, the TNC stores them up and sends out a burst or
packet when you type the "Enter" Key or you type enough characters
to fill up a packet. Studies have shown that the human attention
span when sitting at the keyboard is of the order of 2 seconds. If
you are in a keyboard to keyboard packet radio connect, remember
this and don't forget to use the "Enter" Key frequently, especially
before you stop to think about what to send next.
AMTOR and PACKET are full duplex modes of communications. When you
connect with someone, there is no need to use the transmit and
receive function keys. In fact you will have problems if you do. Do
not disconnect or break the link until the QSO is over.
LAN-LINK PROGRAM HIGHLIGHTS
First packet radio software to be flown in Space.
Function key and Menu driven.
Smart PacketCluster features, i.e. automatic QSY to the
frequency of a DX Alert (if in PacketCluster mode).
Automatic search of HF logbook in response to a PacketCluster DX
Alert Message. Customizable levels of notification. Audio
Notification of Prefix status.
Start Up Communications mode is customizable.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 4
Start Up Packet terminal mode is customizable.
Allows you to search through 2 logbooks for previous contacts.
60 Different Bragtapes/files, 10 in each communications mode.
Automatic logbook entries for Pactor, Packet and Mailbox Beacon
Mode AMTOR Connects, semiautomatic logbook entries for
other modes.
Provides artificial intelligence in the shape of a second
operator (ELMER).
Logbook file is dBASE compatible and can be processed by the
LOGBOOK Package of PC-HAM by G3ZCZ for indexed listings,
tracking of DXCC and other AWARDS, etc.
Contest operation, sends standard message and automatically
increments QSO count.
Automatic optimized configuration of the TNC for each commu-
nications mode.
All mode Function key "OVER" feature (End key).
There are 10 files with fixed names (LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-
LINK.010) which may be viewed and transmitted by means of
function keys. They may also be edited from the Edit Menu.
Set up of TNC for AMSAT-OSCAR Telemetry reception.
Time display and event scheduler.
ASCII Text Editor.
Customizable Colors.
Access to the TNC Command Mode is provided in case the user
wishes to override any defaults.
CQ file.
QSL database and label printing.
In PACKET RADIO
LAN message store and forward capability.
Automatic capture to disk of all packet radio connects.
Automatic indication of the number of Packet connects.
Capable of automatic connect attempts to download a QTC from
another station in the LAN.
Capable of automatic connect attempts to a packet BBS to
download your incoming messages, when your callsign appears
on the BBS mail beacon annunciator.
Capable of automatically requesting Bulletins on subjects that
interest you from your local PBBS.
Digipeat monitoring and capture.
Alert signal to let you know when a predetermined call shows up
in a packet header on frequency.
Conference and Bridge modes in multi-connect situations.
Path determination to DX station via :QMH:.
Indicator that a specific station designated as the "target"
call connected in Packet Mode, or linked to AMTOR Beacon or
Mailbox while you were away.
Automatic NET/ROM and KA-Node path set up from directory file.
Selective answering machine and MAILBOX using NC/L command
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 5
dialogue.
Screen indication of connect by desired station (target call).
Automatic Beacon Mode CQ caller.
Automatic contest (DX-pedition) mode.
Will call CQ repetitively and either work the connect and keep
going after disconnect or signal you when a reply is
received.
Zmodem binary file transfer capability
Customizable BBS Zap Commands.
Automatic search of HF logbook in response to a PacketCluster DX
Alert Message. Customizable levels of notification. Audio
Notification of Prefix status.
CTEXT File (LAN-LINK.OUT) which can be sent to all incoming
connects.
ANSI Colors for Color "Brag Tapes".
SAREX Attack mode lets you digipeat/CQ via the SAREX station as
well as try a connect. Use the CQ feature to digipeat via
MIR, and the connect for the Space Shuttle.
Trigger to determine who else is on channel.
Single keystroke PacketCluster connect.
∙ PacketCluster DX Alert simulation in unconnected mode.
In Pactor
Smart Answering Machine.
CTEXT File (LAN-LINK.OUT) which can be sent to all incoming
connects.
ANSI Colors for Color "Brag Tapes".
Automatic logging of connects.
In AMTOR
Automatic SELCAL determination.
Automatic CQ caller. Will call CQ repetitively and signal you
when a reply is received.
LAN message store and forward capability.
Selective answering machine and MAILBOX using NC/L command
dialogue.
Function key change from monitoring FEC CQ's to QSO's in
progress (chirpcopy).
Automatic Beacon Mode CQ caller.
Automatic contest (DX-pedition) mode.
Color changes between incoming and outgoing (echoed as sent)
text.
In MORSE/BAUDOT/ASCII
Automatic CQ caller. Will call CQ repetitively and signal you
when a reply is received.
RTTY SELCAL.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 6
NAVY MARS RTTY file transmitting protocols.
Getting Started
MAKE A BACK UP COPY OF THE DISK, BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE WRITE
PROTECT TAB. If you are upgrading from a previous version of LAN-
LINK, the 2.00 SYS files are NOT compatible with earlier ones. Copy
all your current LAN-LINK files to a floppy disk and run the
SETUPLL.BAT file on this disk as instructed below.
Place the floppy disk in Drive A: Type "A:" (without the "")
followed by the "Enter" key so that you see the A:> prompt. The
floppy disk contains a batch file which will set up the correct
subdirectories on your hard disk. Type "SETUPLL", touch the "Enter"
key, and the batch file will go to work.
The Install program customizes the most often used parameters for
you. Section 18 of Appendix 2 describes each of the parameters. Read
it as you install LAN-LINK.
Install first asks you for the TNC you are using, reply with the
number associated with your TNC. If you don't find your TNC listed,
try the TNC2 option.
The main things you need to change are:
Your Callsign
Your SELCAL (if you are using a Multi-mode TNC).
PacketCluster Call the callsign of your local PacketCluster.
BBS Call the callsign of your local BBS.
If you have not already connected to your local BBS, skip the next
few parameters, and re-run install at some later time when you know
which answers to reply with, or change them from the LAN-LINK
Parameter menu. These parameters are:
BBS Mail Trigger text in the mail beacon from your local PBBS.
Read Request the command you send to the PBBS to read a
message.
Bulletin Read the command you send to the PBBS to read a
bulletin).
BBS Subject the PBBS prompt for the subject of a message you
are sending.
BBS Message the PBBS prompt for the text of a message you
are sending.
The next few parameters set up the serial port between the PC and
the TNC. Read the TNC Manual to see what the manufacturer's defaults
are. These parameters are
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 7
PC Com Port A 0 disables serial I/O. Set to the Port number
you wish to use.
PC Baud Rate Enter the value you want to use.
Data Bits 7 or 8. Note: 7 will inhibit binary transfers.
Parity Bit Enter the correct letter.
Stop bits Use 1 unless the baud rate is 300 or less.
Read Section 18 of Appendix 2 to learn what the remaining
parameters mean. You can change most of them, once you have loaded
LAN-LINK, by bringing up the Parameters Menu, and following the
prompts.
Bringing LAN-LINK Up the First Time
1 If you haven't run the INSTALL program yet, do it now.
2 Turn on the TNC.
3 Load the program by typing LAN-LINK in the way you normally
load a program.
4 WAIT until the program says it has initialized the TNC and
shows the band and power in the status window at the top of the
screen.
5 If there is no battery in your TNC do what the TNC manual tells
you to do to synchronize the TERMINAL baud rate to 1200 baud.
6 After LAN-LINK has loaded, use the Parameters Menu to change
anything you still need to customize. Use the "U" option to
save the updated file. After reading the rest of this manual,
you may want to change other defaults to set up LAN-LINK the
way you like it.
7 Use the "N" and "I" options in the TNC Menu to configure the
TNC. Then select the desired mode of operation from the
displayed menu by pressing the appropriate key.
8 Exit from LAN-LINK by using the Alt-X Key or the Esc Key
followed by the X Key.
9 Reload LAN-LINK the same way you did before. This will load the
edited LAN-LINK.SYS file with the new settings. You are now
ready to use LAN-LINK. If this is your first time, try the
Quick Menu.
10 If you are updating from previous versions the following
applies. The LAN-LINK.SYS configuration files are incompatible
with any earlier version.
If you have batteries in the TNC, make sure the TNC is set for a
terminal baud rate of 1200, and try to run the program. If you see
Greek characters or it doesn't work, remove the batteries and try
again. You can then replace the batteries and from then on the
program will be correct. Make sure you leave the TNC on when you
replace the batteries or your initialization will revert to the TNC
default settings - the batteries are there to power the TNC RAM
while your primary power is off.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 8
If you have trouble with a PK232MBX, then, with LAN-LINK running,
turn the PK232MBX off, count to ten and turn it on again. Type one *
character. If that fails, repeat it a few times. If it still fails,
open the PK232 and remove the battery jumper. Count to 10 slowly
before replacing it and try again.
Using the Quick Menu
The Quick Menu is designed for new users and provides the most
commonly used functions in a single Menu. You bring up the Quick
Menu by touching the "Escape" key to access the Main Menu and then
selecting the "A" option.
The Quick Menu is described in Section 5.1 of Appendix 2.
Connecting to Other Stations
LAN-LINK treats incoming connects and outgoing connects
differently. To connect to another station, Use the Alt-C hot key,
Function key 5, or bring up the Quick Menu using the "Esc A"
character sequence as described in Section 5.1, or by bringing up
the Call Menu via the "Esc C" character sequence.
DO NOT TYPE "C Callsign" in the command mode. If you do, the connect
will still take place (the TNC won't know if you or LAN-LINK issued
the command) but LAN-LINK will treat it as an incoming connect and
issue the "[ZCZ] LAN-LINK 2.32>" handshaking signal (if the LAN-LINK
flag is in its default, or enabled state). If you connect to a PBBS
or a Node this way, you will get an error message back from the PBBS
or node, since it does not recognize LAN-LINK's handshake.
When you use the menu, Alt-C or F5 approach you can also make use
of the "path memory" feature in the LAN-LINK.DIR file.
Using Different TNCs
There are differences between the command dialogue and the features
offered by the PK-232, DSP-2232, PK-900, PK-88, TNC2, KAM, and
MFJ1278. LAN-LINK makes use of many of them. For example, the KAM
shows the HF and VHF packets as if they were separate streams. LAN-
LINK detects them and displays the different headers in different
colors. As this feature is not present in the PK-232, LAN-LINK does
not offer it for PK-232 users. From time to time, as each
manufacturer updates the firmware (EPROM) in the TNC, LAN-LINK may
be updated and new features added.
LAN-LINK is normally loaded by typing LAN-LINK followed by the
"Enter" key. In this instance, LAN-LINK gets its configuration
information from the LAN-LINK.SYS file. LAN-LINK.SYS is the default
SYSTEM or configuration file. If you have more than one TNC you may
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 9
want to set up different configuration files for each TNC.
To load LAN-LINK with the optional configuration file, type "LAN-
LINK" followed by the name of the file (without the filetype) on the
command line then press the "Enter" Key. For example, if you have a
PK-232 and a TNC2 and occasionally use the TNC2, set up the LAN-
LINK.SYS file for the PK-232. Then type "LAN-LINK" to run the
program normally. On the rare occasions when you want to use the
TNC2, you may type "LAN-LINK TNC2" to run LAN-LINK with the TNC2.SYS
configuration file. Make sure you configure that TNC2.SYS file
before you put any signals on the air.
LAN-LINK Memory Requirements
LAN-LINK 2.32 requires a minimum of 450k of RAM. You will need more
RAM if you wish to use the Editor. The Editor files will each take a
maximum of 64K additional RAM. If your memory is marginal, you may
get an error when you try to log a station or edit a file/message.
PC to TNC Communications
All communications between the computer and the TNC normally use
the 8 BIT NO PARITY and 1 stop bit RS-232 Serial Port configuration.
If you want to limit the character set to the 7 bit ASCII set, set
the TNC parameters accordingly. The baud rate defaults to 1200, but
you may set it to 2400, 4800 9600 or even 19200 if your CPU clock is
fast enough and the TNC will respond correctly.
LAN-LINK Runs Open Loop
IF YOU USE LAN-LINK, YOU STILL MUST READ THE TNC MANUAL. WARNING
THIS PROGRAM OPERATES IN AN OPEN LOOP MODE. IT REMEMBERS WHAT
INSTRUCTIONS OR COMMANDS IT GAVE THE TNC. IF FOR SOME REASON, THE
TNC IS NOT SYNCHRONIZED TO THE PROGRAM YOU WILL NOT GET CORRECT
DISPLAYS ON THE SCREEN.
In Case of Problems
In case you have problems, always check the default settings using
the "Verify Changes" option of the Parameters Menu. If you work CW,
read about the XMITOK flag, and set it for the way you have wired
your TNC to the radio. Problems can be caused by incorrect settings
of the TNC parameters. If all else fails, (hard) reset the TNC. Make
sure XFLOW and FLOW are OFF.
Logbooks
LAN-LINK uses three dBASE 3 compatible logbook files. One is used
for VHF packet logging (VHF.DBF), the second for all HF modes
(HF.DBF) and an optional third logbook designated as a secondary HF
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 10
logbook. See Appendix 2, Section 14 for more information.
How To Get an Update
There are two ways to get an updated version, as follows. When you
register your copy of LAN-LINK, if this version is still current,
your registration will be acknowledged, and the following upgrade
will be sent to you automatically at the time it is released (in
this case, if you move, make sure you notify me of your new
address). If a later version exists at the time that you register,
it will be sent to you when your registration is acknowledged and
you will not be put on the list for an automatic upgrade.
If you are not on the list for an automatic upgrade (i.e., you
received a disk in the mail as a result of your registration), then
when you hear that a new release is out, collect together at least
300 kBytes of traffic on your local VHF/UHF LAN by running LAN-LINK
with the capture-to-disk activated when you are not connected. If
you can add to that, connect to your local PBBS and dump all current
bulletins with full headers showing date/time into your capture-to-
disk file. If necessary compress the file (ZIP preferred), and send
in the disk in a mailer together with a label addressed to you, and
sufficient return postage, and the upgrade will be yours.
Alternatively, you may either download the new version from a land-
line BBS, get it from a friend, or send in $5.00 and remind me what
size disk to send you.
Starting LAN-LINK in a Non Packet Mode
You may start LAN-LINK in a non packet mode, such as Pactor or
Baudot from the DOS command Line. If you wish to do so, the format
of the command is 'LAN-LINK SYSFILE MODE', where SYSFILE is the name
of the LAN-LINK.SYS file or its equivalent, and MODE is the letter
used in the Communications Menu to put the TNC in the particular
mode (See Appendix 2 Section 20). For example, to start LAN-LINK in
AMTOR from DOS, type 'LAN-LINK LAN-LINK A'. To start up in Pactor,
type 'LAN-LINK LAN-LINK P'.If you are using a different
configuration file, such as HF.SYS, type 'LAN-LINK HF A' or 'LAN-
LINK HF P'.
Using LAN-LINK with a PacketCluster
Connect to the PacketCluster using the Alt-Y key. When the
connection is achieved, and the PacketCluster sends you a ">"
character at the end of a line of text, LAN-LINK will issue the
first cluster command, followed by the second one, to the
PacketCluster and return to manual operation. The default commands
are "SHOW/WWV/1" command followed by a "SHOW/DX". Note:
PacketCluster is a specialized PBBS and conference node by Pavillion
Software for DX chasers.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 11
LAN-LINK also sets an internal PacketCluster Mode Flag. When this
flag is set, LAN-LINK will interpret DX announcements, check your hf
logbook and alert you to the status of that prefix in both sound and
color. If you want LAN-LINK to react to the DX Alerts and search
your HF logbook, to see if you have QSLd or Worked or Need the
prefix, customize the Packet Cluster DX Alert Mode in line 112 of
the LAN-LINK.SYS file to your liking. The parts of the DX Alert
message will be shown in different colors.
Options in the PBBS/PacketCluster Menu allow you to customize the
check to set up which bands and which modes are checked. For example
if you never work the 160 Meter band, you may customize LAN-LINK to
ignore 160 Meter DX Announcements.
The results of a logcheck show up at the end of the DX Alert
message. LAN-LINK also changes the current band (see status window)
to the band of the call shown in the DX alert.
The displays and log check function are slightly different in the
Contest and Non contest modes of operation.
In the contest Mode, LAN-LINK checks the logbook for the complete
callsign. The meaning of the character shown at the end of the DX
Alert line are as shown below.
Letter Meaning
--------------------
B worked on the same band
W worked on another band
Q the callsign has been QSLd
- the prefix was not found (check mark)
In the non contest Mode, LAN-LINK checks the logbook for the prefix
(2 or 3 letters) of the callsign. The meaning of the character shown
at the end of the DX Alert line are as shown below.
Letter Meaning
-------------------------------------
W worked on the same band
w worked on another band
Q the prefix has been QSLd on the same band
q the prefix has been QSLd on another band
- the prefix was not found (checkmark)
In both contest and non contest modes, a blank space at the end of
the line means that the prefix was not checked.
You may use the Alt-G key to grab a DX Alert from the incoming or
scrollback windows. LAN-LINK will set the Radio to frequency and
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 12
post the call. This is similar to the action of F10.
You can also enable an automatic QSY to the frequency of a DX Alert
via the Radio Menu.
Simulating a PacketCluster with LAN-LINK
The PacketCluster is a very useful tool for those of us who are
interested in working DX. However, many radio amateurs live in areas
which are not served by PacketClusters. LAN-LINK 2.34+ allows these
"deprived" hams to enjoy the DX-alert feature of the PacketCluster.
If you send a DX-alert when connected to another station, LAN-LINK
assumes you are connected to a PacketCluster and transmits the DX-
alert message in the format expected by the PacketCluster. If you
are non connected LAN-LINK transmits the DX-alert as an unconnected
packet in the same format as transmitted by the PacketCluster. The
message is repeated a number of times depending on the value stored
in the CQ Lines parameter (Section 18.23.5). To make sure everyone
in the group sees the message, set LAN-LINK to digipeat through a
well sighted station (e.g. DIGICALL). For example, in the command
mode set the TNC 'UNP DX via DIGICALL'. The turn on the
PacketCluster mode (BBS Menu option 'K') and enjoy the DX alerts.
Using ANSI Color for Transmitting Text Color Files
ANSI control codes are designed to allow you to control the display
at the other end of the link. LAN-LINK 2.10+ reacts to some ANSI
control codes including the color codes. This feature allows you to
send colorful bragtapes and other files using the text mode graphics
of the PC character set when operating packet or Pactor. The feature
was updated in LAN-LINK 2.30 to also react to cursor move commands
to allow transmission of dynamic pictures.
ANSI color codes are a sequence of characters beginning with the
'Escape' Character (represented as "Esc" or "^[") followed by a [
character, one or two numbers follow and the sequence terminates
with the letter "m". Typical examples are 'Esc [37m' and 'Esc [40m'.
To save time, several codes may be combined using the semi-colon
character as in 'Esc [37;40m'.
The ANSI color control code sequences are shown in the following
table. If you are using the LAN-LINK editor, you must use the '^P^['
pair of keystrokes to enter the 'Escape' character into the file,
which will then show up in white instead of the customary yellow.
First Digit Second Digit Function
1 None Sets Lighter/bolder foreground
color
3 0-7 Changes foreground color see
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 13
below
4 0-7 Changes background color see
below
5 None Start Blinking
7 None Start Reverse Video
0 None Changes to Terminal's low text
color, clears blinking, reverse
video or bold colors
The color values for the secondary digits are as follows.
Digit Foreground Color Background Color
0 Black Black
1 Red Red
2 Green Green
3 Yellow Brown
4 Blue Blue
5 Magenta Magenta
6 Cyan Cyan
7 White Light Grey
When transmitting lines of color, the ANSI control codes add
characters to the line, so your line will probably contain more than
80 characters. Make sure you set the correct TNC parameter (i.e.
SCREENLN) to 255 to ensure that the TNC doesn't add extra 'CR/LF'
codes to your picture and mess it up.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 14
Appendix 2 LAN-LINK Features, Menus and Commands
LAN-LINK provides an interface between you and the TNC. It works in
a client-server mode. It provides you with menus, and then sends the
TNC the commands that you would have had to type to exercise the
particular option. LAN-LINK also provides smart features to smarten
up your packet radio operations.
This appendix contains a summary of the commands and menus
available to you in LAN-LINK. The commands are organized by Menu.
Some function keys provide you with short cuts so you don't have to
go through the entire menus. These function keys are described
below.
1.0 LAN-LINK MESSAGE HANDLING FEATURES
This section describes the mail box and message handling features
built into LAN-LINK.
1.1 Answering Machine
LAN-LINK contains an AMTOR (Robot beacon CQ mode only) and PACKET
Mode SMART "answering machine" facility. You can leave messages on
your disk (in the same directory as the LAN-LINK.* files, if you are
using a hard disk), for different stations. When someone connects to
you, if you left a message for him, he (or she or even it as the
case may be) and only that station will receive it automatically. No
one else will normally be able to download that message.
1.2 Mail Beacon (Annunciator)
To ensure that people know that you have left a message for them a
"MAIL for" list is loaded into your Packet Beacon and transmitted
every 30 minutes (Refer to the BTEXT command in the TNC manual) as
":QTC:" followed by a list of calls. If no mail is pending, or the
only message in your system is one addressed to you, the beacon
transmissions are inhibited. This conforms to good operating
practice on crowded channels (at least inhibiting the beacon does).
The mail beacon in the AMTOR Mode is transmitted as part of the
beacon AUTOCQ message. It is automatically updated when a message is
transmitted. If you don't set the beacon (see below) you will not
transmit a mail beacon text in your AMTOR CQ message.
The Mail beacon text is set up either when you tell the computer to
set it up or when you disconnect a packet QSO from another station.
In this manner you may update the list while the program is running,
for example, by using Borland's Sidekick or the included Editor, to
write a message, or preferably the NOTE feature.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 15
Any station using LAN-LINK can be configured to automatically
attempt a connect (QTC-Snatch) when seeing their callsign in someone
else's LAN-LINK :QTC: beacon mail message list.
If for some reason the message got lost (e.g. because the link was
marginal), :QSM: will get you a repeat of that message.
1.3 How to Leave a Message
You can use the "note" feature or type the message as a non-
document file on the included Editor, or if you use another word
processor, you must leave the message as an ASCII text file. In that
case, you just name the message file as the callsign of the station
to whom you wish the message to be sent at connect time. You must
also give it the filetype of "OUT".
For example, a message for G3ZCZ would be stored on the disk as a
file named "G3ZCZ.OUT", and similarly a message to 4X6AA would be
stored on disk as "4X6AA.OUT".
Once the message has been sent, an entry to that effect will be
made in the LAN-LINK.RUN data capture file. The message file will
then be renamed and given the file extension ".OLD". At that time
any previously existing mail file with the file extension ".OLD"
will be deleted. This stops the addressee receiving the message on
successive connects if you can't delete it for some reason (you
forget) while at the same time, the message is still available to
you in case you need it.
You should use a separate utility program if you want the calls in
the mail beacon sorted. You may, for example, wish to sort them in
alphanumeric order, or in the order of the date that they were left
in your answering machine.
Incoming messages triggered by the QTC-Snatch will be left in a
message file named as YOURCALLSIGN.OUT, which can be scanned by
using the Alt-M Key combination. If you have non LAN-LINK friends,
train them to trigger the QTC-Snatch by simulating a beacon, and
prefixing and ending their text with lines containing the ">" as the
only character. Better yet, give them a copy of LAN-LINK and tell
them to use it and register it.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 16
2.0 LAN-LINK WINDOWS
LAN-LINK displays information in different windows as shown in
Figure 2. The window at the top of the screen is the status window.
The big blank window in the center is the incoming text window. The
lower third of the screen is the outgoing text window. All outgoing
text are echoed in this window. The bottom line is a prompt window.
Figure 2 Typical LAN-LINK Windows
╔ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ G8BTB's LAN-LINK 2.32 (c) G3ZCZ 1988-1994═ ═ ╦ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╗
║ PACKET 1200W TRFC ║ 03:19:11 ║
╚ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╩ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╝
╔ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ OUTGOING TEXT═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╗
║ ║
║ ║
║ ║
║ ║
║ ║
╚ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╝
:Esc=Menu FK:1=Ctdsk 3=Calls 5=MHlist 6=aUtoCQ 8=Disc 9=Cmd 10=Conv
The indicators in the status line depend on the state of the LAN
Link and are described in the sections that deal with the functions
they are associated with. Some typical status window displays are
shown below.
2 Meters 2 Watts PACKET 1200 W [R] TRFC ->N4QQ
20 Meters 100 Watts MORSE TEST[4]
20 Meters 100 Watts PACKET 300 N TRFC
CAPTURE TO DISK PACKET 300 N [C1][Z] TRFC ->N4QQ
If the automatic Capture-to-disk is turned off, a yellow bug will
be flashing on the left side of the line.
If the Printer Flag is set, a yellow [P] will be flashing on the
left side of the line.
If the miscellaneous flag is set, an asterisk "*" followed by two
numbers and a "]" will be displayed. The first number is the PBBS
Sequence State, the second is the Connect Sequence State.
These numbers reflect the internal state of LAN-LINK and should be
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 17
quoted when describing problems.
If a message transfer is taking place, the callsign of the station
involved will be displayed.
When the Capture-to-Disk is turned on, the words "CAPTURE TO DISK"
will be displayed. If it is turned off, the operating band (Meters)
and power (Watts) will be shown. If a Zap PBBS is in operation, the
Bulletin Request Count will then be shown in square brackets ("[]").
The communications mode will be shown next, it may be one of the
following;
PACKET AMTOR AMTOR-(MAIL) AMTOR-FEC
BAUDOT ASCII MORSE NAVTEX
SIGNAL ???? DEFAULT {boot up}
A flashing yellow musical note following the Communications Mode
indicates that the sound has been inhibited.
The next number to be displayed is the RF communications baudrate.
The letter "W" or "N" indicates that the Wide shift or the Narrow
shift has been selected. A "down arrow" will be shown if the shift
is normal. If the shift is reversed a flashing yellow "up arrow"
will be displayed.
In the BAUDOT mode, "USOS" will be displayed if unshift- on-space
is selected.
If the Contest Mode is selected, the word "TEST" will then be
displayed followed by the Contest QSO number in "[]".
In certain Robot and AutoCQ states, namely while the computer is
waiting for a reply, a flashing cumulative CQ count will be
displayed next.
If the RTTY SELCAL is active, the word "SELCAL" will be displayed
next.
If the Navy MARS BAUDOT RTTY protocol is enabled, a "[n]" will be
displayed.
In the packet and AMTOR Robot modes, if at least one station has
connected or linked, a flashing yellow "[C]" will be displayed next.
The number in the square brackets with the "C" is the number of
stations that have connected/linked. If the target call station was
one of those station, a happy face will also be displayed in the
square brackets.
If at least one QTC snatch has taken place a flashing yellow "[Q]"
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 18
will be displayed next. The number in the square brackets is the
number of QTC Snatches that have taken place.
In the packet communications mode, if a Zap PBBS, a QTC Snatch or a
PacketCluster Zap is in progress a flashing yellow "[Z]""will be
displayed next. However, if LAN-LINK is set to stay connected when
the sequence ends, the flashing indicator will be a "{Z}" instead of
"[Z]".
If the PacketCluster DX Alert Flag is enabled a flashing yellow
"[K]""will be displayed.
In the packet or AMTOR communications mode, a "[R]" will be
displayed next if LAN-LINK is configured for store and forward
(:QSP:).
In the packet and AMTOR communications modes, if the beacon mode is
enabled a "[B]" will be displayed next. If someone has connected and
sent a :QRT: sequence, the "[B]" will be flashing. The "[B]" will be
followed by a "[M]" if there are messages pending. The number in the
square brackets with the "[M]" is the number of messages (*.OUT
files) pending.
In the packet communications mode, if the SAREX mode is enabled, a
"[S]" will be shown next. The "[S]" will be flashing while capture
to disk is in progress. If SAREX packets have been copied a happy
face will be displayed in the square brackets together with the "S".
If the SAREX Orbiter robot is active a flashing ">>" will be
displayed.
In the packet communications mode, if the digipeat Detect mode is
enabled, a "[D]" will be displayed next.
In the packet communications mode, if connected and ELMER is
active, an "[E]" will be displayed. The number with the "E" shows
ELMER's state.
In the packet communications mode, the terminal sub-modes are then
displayed as follows;
SOLO This lets you only see messages addressed to you.
CQ/B This lets you see beacons and CQ calls as well.
TRFC This lets you see packets containing messages as well.
EVRY This lets you see everything on channel, including the link
control packets.
MAIL This lets you monitor packets from a specific station. In the
PK-232, you can do it without displaying the headers.
The next item to be displayed is a callsign, under the following
conditions: the call of the station connected with, will be prefixed
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 19
by a "*>" when connected, and by a "->" when a connect request is in
progress. If a disconnect is in progress, the callsign will be
replaced by a "$$$$". The callsign will be seen as flashing when a
connect is in progress.
In the MAIL mode, the callsign of the station that you are "reading
the mail" on will be displayed. Otherwise, the callsign displayed
will be that of the one you are connected with.
If an Alert Call has been entered, it will be displayed next.
Similarly, if a Target Call has been designated, the target call
will be displayed next. The display will be slightly different of
the calls have been heard/worked. A "!!>" before the flashing call
indicates that the Alert function is active. A "<->" before the
Alert Call signifies that packets to or from that call have been
heard on frequency. A smiling face in front of the call, signifies
that it has been worked. A "->" is displayed before the Target Call.
The next items to be displayed are the packet multi user mode
displays. If the conference bridge is up, a flashing yellow bridge
will be shown. If only the conference mode is set, the letter "C"
will be flashing, if the basic multi user mode is set, the word "M"
will be seen. The callsign will be prefixed by the I/O channel
number/letter, and will be in the color allocated to the traffic on
that channel. The number shown after the flashing letter is the
number of streams that LAN-LINK thinks that you are connected on.
In the non packet modes, the callsign displayed will be that of the
station being worked (entered by the AMTOR robot, the automatic CQ
call recognition, or by the operator using the Alt-C or Alt-E keys).
In AMTOR, the SELCAL of the other station will also be displayed
sometimes, usually if you entered the call.
An "[L]" will be displayed in the non packet modes when a callsign
is entered. The "[L]" will flash to remind you (to log it) until the
QSO is logged.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 20
3.0 HOT KEYS
LAN-LINK contains a number of "Hot" keys to allow you to perform
common operations with a minimum of key strokes. The keys perform
related but slightly different tasks in each communications mode. A
list of those available is shown in Table 3-1. Should you require
any more hot keys, I suggest you use an external program with a
Keyboard Macro capability such as Borland's Superkey. Consider the
action of each key in detail.
Table 3-1 LAN-LINK Hot Keys
HOT PACKET AMTOR BAUDOT & ASCII CW
KEY
3 Change foreground color
4 Change background color
A Set ALERT Call ARQ Call/Talk - -
B Send "Break" Force Changeover - -
to TNC
C Connect ARQ Call Call Call
D Disconnect Toggle Receive Disengage
Receive Modes Speed Lock
E Enter Call Enter Call/Selcal Enter Call Enter Call
F Flush TNC Buffer
G Grab call and frequency from DX Alert
H Display Function key Information Screen
J Jump to DOS
K PacketCluster DX-Alert
L Log Entry
M Scan Message
N Next I/O Stream - - -
O Turn Robot ON Turn Robot ON - -
P Turn Printer ON/OFF
Q Call QRZ
R Retry Last Connect/Call
S Scan Logbook
T - Talk in PacketCluster (PK-900/DSP-2232 only)
W :QRA: - - - -
X Exit to DOS
Y Zap PacketCluster Transmit RY's
Z Zap PBBS Drop Link Receive -
after sending mode after
contents of buffer sending contents
of buffer
3.1 Alt-3 Change Foreground Color
This key combination allows you to change the foreground color of
the outgoing text. It will transmit the ANSI color sequence to
change color.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 21
3.2 Alt-4 Change Background Color
This key combination allows you to change the background color of
the outgoing text. It will transmit the ANSI color sequence to
change color.
3.3 Alt-A Alert Call (Packet) and AMTOR ARQ Call/Talk
In the Packet Communications Mode, this key combination performs
the same task as the Alert Call option in the Call Menu.
In AMTOR, this key combination will attempt to send an ARQ call to
the desired station, transmit the callsign sequence when linked and
allow you to continue typing text (i.e. it will not transmit the
"+?" characters). Use this command option to log on to an APLINK
PBBS.
3.4 Alt-B Send Break/AMTOR Changeover
In the Packet Communications Mode, activating this key combination
sends a "BREAK" signal to the TNC. Use this key combination to get
out of the TNC's transparent mode.
In the AMTOR Communications Mode, use this key combination to force
a changeover. You can type text into the outgoing buffer and then
force a changeover without losing that text.
3.5 Alt-C Call/Connect to Someone
This key combination works in almost the same manner in both the
packet and non packet communications modes as described in the
following sections.
3.5.1 Non Packet Modes
You use this key combination to call a station heard on the band.
In AMTOR the link request will be sent in the ARQ Mode to the SELCAL
of the desired station. (Note that this option sends the "+?" after
the callsign sequence).
3.5.2 Packet Mode
You use this key combination to attempt a connect with another
packet station. In a multiconnect situation the LAN-LINK will
automatically select a free I/O channel to try the connect.
3.5.2.1 Names, Handles and Paths: If you so desire, you can create a
directory file (default name is LAN-LINK.DIR) and keep a list of
names and calls. The computer will look up a name and call the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 22
station by its callsign. For example if you put "Joe G3ZCZ" as a
line in the file, when you tell the computer to connect to Joe, it
will try to connect to G3ZCZ. If you enter "4X4HF 4X4HF V 4X1AA,
4Z4ZB, 4X4IL" on a line in the file, you only need to type "4X4HF"
to set up the correct connect path.
You can also use this feature to automate a NET/ROM and/or a KA-
Node path connection.
3.5.2.2 Loop Backs: In the Packet Communications Mode, if you want
to loop back through someone else you would have to type "C YOURCALL
VIA OTHERCALL" to the TNC. For example if I wanted to loop back
through 4X6AA, I would have to type the command "C G3ZCZ VIA 4X6AA"
to the TNC.
In LAN-LINK you just have to enter the "/" character followed by
the call of the station you want to loop back through. For example
if I wanted to loop back through 4X6AA, I just need to enter
"/4X6AA" as the call to connect to at the correct prompt, and LAN-
LINK will tell the TNC to try to connect to G3ZCZ via 4X6AA, namely
issue the command "C G3ZCZ VIA 4X6AA" to the TNC.
3.6 Alt-D Disconnect or Receive
This key combination performs the same task as Function Key 8 (F8)
EXCEPT in MORSE and AMTOR.
In the Morse communications mode, this key disengages the receive
speed lock in the PK-232 to unlock the PK-232 from the last signal
copied. It lets you lock onto another signal faster.
In AMTOR this key toggles the receive mode between ARQ and FEC
signals (QSO's in progress and CQ calls).
3.7 Alt-E Enter Call
This key combination lets you enter the call of any station calling
you into the program. If you type the Enter Key in response to the
prompt, you can later use Function Key (F3) to transmit the sequence
"DE YOURCALL". You may also use the Retry feature to call that
station.
In AMTOR, you use the feature to enter the callsign and SELCAL of
the station you are listening to and may want to call later.
3.8 Alt-F Flush TNC Buffer
This key combination performs the same task as the Flush TNC
Outgoing buffer option in the TNC Menu.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 23
3.9 Alt-G Grab Call and Frequency from DX Alert Message
Activate this key combination, then move the cursor to the line
containing the DX Alert message and touch the 'Enter' key. LAN-LINK
will then parse the line and extract the callsign and frequency.
3.10 Alt-H Help Information for Function Keys
This key combination lets you display a brief reminder of the
action of each hot key. It performs the same function as the "H"
option in the Main Menu.
3.11 Alt-J Jump to DOS
This key combination lets you "Jump to a DOS Shell". It performs
the same function as the "J" option in the Main Menu.
3.12 Alt-K PacketCluster DX Alert
This key combination initiates the PacketCluster DX Alert sequence
described in the BBS Menu.
3.13 Alt-L Log Contact
This key combination appends the callsign for the current QSO to
the Log.
3.14 Alt-M Message Scan
This key combination performs the same task as the Message Scan
choice in the Message Menu.
3.15 Alt-N Next Stream
In the Packet Communications Mode, if you are using the multiple
connect capability of LAN-LINK, this key combination prompts you to
change I/O streams, and display the state of the I/O streams,
showing which ones were last used to send or receive something. To
change I/O streams, move the cursor to the desired stream then push
the "Enter" Key. The calls in the Next Stream window update when
stations connect and disconnect. In the event of the window not
being correct, you may manually enter or delete calls using the
"Insert" Key to enter a call, and the "Delete" Key to remove a call.
The data about the streams will be shown in the same colors as the
multi-stream text colors.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 24
3.16 Alt-O Turn Robot ON
This key combination performs the same function as the Set ROBOT
option in the AMTOR Terminal Menu. The hot key combination however,
is active in the Packet, Pactor, G-TOR and AMTOR communications
modes.
This function key also puts the Packet and AMTOR Contest operation
into automatic.
3.17 Alt-P Turn Printer ON/OFF
This key combination performs the same function as the toggle
printer on/off option in the Parameter Menu.
3.18 Alt-Q Call QRZ
This key combination transmits the sequence "QRZ QRZ QRZ DE
YOURCALL" and turns the transceiver back to receive. In AMTOR, it
sends the sequence in FEC and adds the SELCAL.
3.19 Alt-R Retry Call/Connect
This key combination allows you to retry a connect that for some
reason did not go through the first time. It saves wear and tear on
your fingers particularly if the desired connect path is via a
number of digipeat relays or through a number of Nodes.
In the non packet modes, it allows you to retransmit a call to
another station without having to re-enter the call.
If you have previously used the "Enter Call" feature to put a
callsign in the program when you hear that station, you can use the
Retry command to call him later when the QSO in progress terminates.
3.20 Alt-S Scan Log
This key combination performs the same function as the Scan option
in the LOG Menu.
3.21 Alt-W :QRA:
In the Packet Communications Mode, this key combination performs
the same task as the "W" option in the LAN-LINK menu. It puts the
TNC in the converse mode, sends a ":QRA:" and returns the TNC to the
command mode.
3.22 Alt-X Exit to DOS
This key combination performs the same task as the Exit to Dos
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 25
choice in the Main Menu. It exits the program and returns you to
DOS.
3.23 Alt-Y Zap PacketCluster/RTTY Transmit "RY"s
In the Packet Communications Mode, this key combination first
prompts you with the callsign of the PacketCluster. If you enter a
callsign, the entered callsign will become the new PacketCluster
call. LAN-LINK then issues a connect request to the PacketCluster.
When the connection is achieved, and the PacketCluster sends you a
">" character at the end of a line of text, LAN-LINK will issue the
first cluster command, followed by the second one, to the Packet-
Cluster and return to manual operation. The default commands are
"SHOW/WWV/1" command followed by a "SHOW/DX". Note: PacketCluster is
a specialized PBBS/conference by Pavillion Software for DX chasers.
In the RTTY communications mode, this key combination causes a
sequence of "RY"s to be transmitted.
3.24 Alt-Z Zap PBBS
In the Packet Communications Mode, the Alt-Z key initiates a PBBS
Mail Snatch. You use this key if you connect to a PBBS before you
hear its beacon, or if you have disabled the PBBS Mail Snatch
feature. If you are connected to a PBBS, the key must be used BEFORE
the first ">" is received. The first ">" triggers the sequence. If
you have already received that first ">", send the PBBS any command,
and the sequence should begin when the PBBS signals that it has
completed processing that command. If you are not connected, LAN--
LINK will first try to connect to the PBBS, then perform the
sequence.
When you use this command you will be asked if you want to upload
or download. If you want to download, just push the "Enter" Key. A
Download (Mail from the PBBS to you) will automatically be followed
by an Upload if the *.BBS file exists.
The download default sequence performed by the PBBS Mail Snatch is
as follows:
RM To read your messages, (Configurable)
L To let you know what is new on the PBBS,
LM To list ALL your messages on the PBBS,
B To log you off the PBBS.
LAN-LINK will wait for the ">" as the last character of the line of
text being received from the PBBS, before issuing the next command
in the sequence. Your messages will be placed in a message file
YOURCALL.OUT as if someone else had left a message for you.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 26
The "RM" may be customized in the LAN-LINK.SYS file to "RN" or "VM"
depending on the software in your local PBBS, and, on your
preference.
During the time that the PBBS is responding to the "L" command with
a list of new messages, LAN-LINK is scanning the lines containing
the messages to see if it finds one containing a Scan Word. If it
does find a Scan Word, LAN-LINK will change the color of the line,
and queue a request to download that message.
The PBBS Mail Snatch can be initiated in two ways. It can be
initiated when your incoming screen displays a "Mail" beacon
(received from your local PBBS) with your call in the lines
following the header, or by LAN-LINK's Zap PBBS function (this key
combination). The automatic PBBS Zap will not take place if LAN-LINK
is in the multi-user mode.
In the event of a PBBS Mail-Snatch, if the *.BBS file exists for
that PBBS, the file will be processed and the contents sent to the
PBBS. Thus if you don't get a chance to send the mail before LAN-
LINK downloads the mail from the PBBS, it will send it for you.
When the PBBS has accepted the commands the name of the file is
changed from "*.BBS" to "*.n", where "n" is a number increasing
sequentially each time the function is performed from a base value
set up in the LAN-LINK.SYS file. For example, the file name KE8X.BBS
will be changed to KE8X.001 the first time it happens. In this way,
you will have a copy of the outgoing file on your disk until you
choose to delete it.
In the real world however, message formats are nonstandard, and can
contain any set of characters. The algorithm developed here
transmits the next line in the *.BBS file when LAN-LINK sees a
"trigger" character string unless one of the "inhibitor" character
strings is also present on the line of the message text received by
LAN-LINK.
These "trigger" character strings are ">" (as the last character of
the line of text), and the customizable ones such as "Enter",
"Subject", "Sj:" and "Msg:". The "inhibitor" character strings are
"R:", "<" and "Message" ("R:" as in routing headers and "<" and
"Message" as in Message-Id: <message number> in message headers).
This should cover most simulated manual PBBS message reading
(WA7MBL and W0RLI/VE3GYQ) and avoid false triggering due to ">"s
showing up in message and routing headers.
When LAN-LINK finishes processing the *.BBS file, it will send a
"B" command to the PBBS to terminate the session.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 27
This PBBS Zap feature is designed to minimize the time you spend
connected to the PBBS by allowing you to scan the message list when
automatically receiving your mail, prepare your replies, and
download requests off-line and then later read the incoming messages
or files without tying up the PBBS. For this reason, it thus
disconnects you from the PBBS. You can, however, override the
automatic disconnect command for the duration of the connection
using the "F" option in the Parameter Menu.
3.25 Alt-= Toggle Miscellaneous Flag
This key combination performs the same function as the "+" option
in the parameters menu.
3.26 End "> +?" [Over]
In the Packet Communications Mode this command sends your callsign
followed by the ">" and "Carriage Return, Line Feed" character
combination. You may use this to signal "OVER" in a packet contact.
In the AMTOR Communications Mode this command sends the "+?"
sequence of characters which is the software "OVER" signal. LAN-LINK
will change colors when it recognizes the '+?' in the incoming
window.
In the Pactor Communications Mode this command sends the "=>"
sequence of characters and switches the link to allow the other
station to send. LAN-LINK will change colors when it recognizes the
'=>' in the incoming window.
In the MORSE and RTTY (BAUDOT and ASCII) communications modes, this
command lets you transmit the "KN" sequence and returns you to the
Receive Mode. LAN-LINK will change colors when it recognizes the
'KN' in the incoming window. In these modes there is no standard for
signalling 'over'. The 'KN' sequence may show up in text (i.e. in
the word KNOW) or in a callsign (i.e. G9KNA) and cause a color
change. If this "random" color change bothers you in BAUDOT, change
line 114 in the LAN-LINK.SYS file from KN to some other pair of
characters that should not show up in normal text.
If you have typed something into the "type ahead buffer" and then
press this key, the contents of the buffer will be transmitted
followed by the turnover command.
For example, if you are 4X6AA, and you are working G3ZCZ, then you
would use Function Key 3 (F3) to transmit the sequence "G3ZCZ de
4X6AA" and this key to send "over" and revert to receive.
3.27 PgUp Scrollback (Scrolls back incoming text)
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 28
This key lets you repeat the display of up to 512 lines of incoming
text which has scrolled out of the incoming window. You may print it
or capture it to disk during the repeat.
The bottom line menu displays your options when showing the scroll
back information. Use the "Escape" key to terminate the Scrollback
Mode.
You can save the contents scrollback buffer displayed on the screen
by turning the "Capture-to-Disk" on, and then writing text to the
window. Anything written will be captured. If the Capture-to-disk is
ON before or during scrollback, you will get two copies of the text
in the file.
3.28 The Home Key
The Home Key will clear the window screen that the cursor happens
to be in at the time that the key was depressed, and will then
position the cursor at the top left hand corner of that window.
3.29 The Down Arrow Key
The Down Arrow Key toggles the Normal/Reverse Sideband command in
all communications modes except MORSE. The sideband is depicted in
the status window by the "Up" and "Down" arrows. If the "Down" Arrow
is showing, you are set for Lower Sideband (LSB) which is the one
normally used.
If you set your transceiver to LSB, you will be set correctly for
all modes. If you have reversed the sidebands, a flashing "Up" Arrow
will be displayed. For CW operation you may set your rig to the CW
position and ignore the sideband setting. If you use FSK, just set
it so that it works for you.
3.30 Shift/Baudrate Control Keys
The following keys are used to control the Shift (Wide or narrow)
and the Radio link baudrate in the BAUDOT and ASCII communications
modes. In the BAUDOT and ASCII communications modes all baud rates
supported by the PK-232 may be selected.
3.30.1 RIGHT ARROW
This key speeds up the baud rate. In the CW communications mode,
the right arrow increases the CW speed by 1 wpm.
3.30.2 LEFT ARROW
This key slows down the baud rate. In the CW communications mode,
the left arrow decreases the CW speed by 1 wpm.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 29
3.30.3 UP ARROW
This key toggles the shift from Wide shift (850 Hz) to Narrow shift
(170 Hz) and back. If you are using a KAM, it will also pass through
the 425 Hz shift position.
3.30.4 DELETE
This key toggles the USOS command (RTTY only).
The state of each of the above commands are displayed in the status
window at the top of the screen. If USOS is active, "USOS" will be
shown. The shift is shown as "W" or "N" for wide or narrow
respectively.
3.31 Control T (^T)
This key combination inserts the date-time-text string into the
outgoing buffer. A typical example is "11-Mar-93 01:39".
3.32 Control-Z (^Z)
This key combination is used in the Packet Communication Mode to
signal the end of a file or message, when loading messages into
another LAN-LINK system or into a PBBS. In the AMTOR Communications
Mode, it is automatically translated into the sequence " :EOF: +? "
which can be used to terminate a message being stored in another
LAN-LINK AMTOR mailbox. In the other communications modes, it also
causes a changeover sequence to take place.
3.33 Alt-T Talk to another station connected to the PacketCluster
This function key performs same function as the 'T' option in the
BBS/PacketCluster Menu.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 30
4.0 FUNCTION KEYS
Function keys are used to perform operations common to all
communications modes, or to allow fast performance of a function
without having to go through several layers of menus. The action of
each of the function keys is described in the following sections.
The function key number corresponds to the paragraph number, namely
4.1 refers to Function Key 1 (F1), etc.
4.1 Capture to Disk Toggle (F1)
This key toggles the "capture-to-disk" command. When the "capture-
to-disk" is active, all incoming text (including "Echo as sent"
outgoing text) is stored on a disk (floppy or hard) in a file called
"YYMMDD.RUN" where YY is the last two digits of the year, MM the
month and DD the day (E.G. 900824.RUN). If this file does not exist
the first time that LAN-LINK is loaded, it is created. From that
time on, for the rest of that day, successive activations append new
data to the contents of the file.
Each time the command is activated a datestamp (or timetag) will be
written to the file.
When a Packet station connects "capture-to-disk" will be activated
automatically unless you instruct LAN-LINK not to do so with the
Capture-to-disk flag. Packet connects will thus be recorded in their
entirety automatically unless you turn off the "Capture-to-disk"
during the course of the QSO. "Capture-to-disk" will be stopped at
disconnect time.
You may later edit the file at your convenience with your favorite
word processor or the included Editor. However, if your word
processor can only handle files smaller than 64k, make sure that the
"capture-to-disk" file remains smaller. You can do this by renaming
the file to something like "LAN-RUN.001". LAN-LINK will
automatically close the "capture-to-disk" file when you terminate
the program and return to DOS.
You can make Capture-to-disk active when you scroll back. You can
use this feature to save data that has already scrolled by the
window.
4.2 Send Brag Tape and Talk (F2)
This command lets you transmit the Brag Tape (Default LAN-
LINK.TXT). In the non packet modes, it will leave the transmitter on
after sending the file. In the packet mode it will send a ^Z after
sending the file to notify the recipient that the file is complete.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 31
4.3 Transmit Callsign Sequence (F3)
This command lets you transmit the following sequence OTHERCALL DE
YOURCALL. For example, if you are 4X6AA, and you are working G3ZCZ,
then this command would transmit the sequence "G3ZCZ de 4X6AA". You
may use this key at the start and end of a transmission in any mode
except Packet.
4.4 Send Brag Tape (F4)
This command lets you transmit the Brag Tape (Default LAN-
LINK.TXT). In the non packet modes, it will turn the transmitter off
after sending the file.
4.5 Show Packet "MH" list and Point and Shoot Connect (F5)
This command lets you see what calls the TNC has heard recently on
the Packet channels. You can see up to 18 callsigns, with the date
and time they were last logged by the TNC. Refer to the "MH" command
in the TNC manual for the particulars of the display.
The MH list shows up in a special window and freezes until you
depress any key. While the list is frozen, LAN-LINK is not
monitoring received data, so don't freeze it too long.
When you activate F5, LAN-LINK redirects all data coming from the
TNC into the MHwindow. If the MH list is blank, or information comes
in from the TNC between the time you entered the command and the
time the list is sent back, subsequent text from the TNC will show
up in the MH window until the next "Cmd:" appears or 18 lines of
text have been received.
You can also use this command in a point and shoot method for
attempting a connect with a station you have heard. Bring up the MH
Window and move the cursor to the desired callsign. When the cursor
is positioned on any character in the call, press the "Enter" Key
and that call will be recognized as the callsign. If the call is
joined to the word "Cmd:" or the cursor is positioned on a space or
blank, the connect attempt will be inhibited.
LAN-LINK has no way of knowing when the MH list is complete.
Consequently, it sends two commands to the TNC to implement this
feature. The "MH" command instructs the TNC to start sending the MH
List, the "ZCZ" command forces an error response from the TNC. LAN-
LINK uses the error response to close the MH Window.
This command does not work on the TNC1.
4.6 Auto CQ Call (F6)
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 32
This command will send a CQ sequence, wait a presettable delay and
then repeat the CQ sequence until it receives your call back from
someone else. When it does so, it will alert you with a Connect
Alarm signal, reset the delay timer, and revert to the normal or
listening mode. In AMTOR it will revert to the mode in which it is
waiting for an ARQ call and is able to copy FEC signals on
frequency.
When the Automatic CQ sequence is in operation, an indication will
be shown in the status window. The indicator will be steady while
the transmitter is sending the CQ text, and will blink while the
receiver is listening for a reply.
The time delay between calls is set using the "Q" command in the
Parameters Menu (Set CQ delay time). It is also set as a defined
default by you when you setup your LAN-LINK.SYS file.
The automatic CQ command will only work in the TNC non packet modes
if the "Echo as Sent" parameter is set to "ON" per the LAN-LINK.SYS
file. In other words, you must be able to see the CQ text slowly
echo in the incoming window for the command to work. This is because
the "K K K" (or "+?" in AMTOR) sequence is used to arm the software
to look for a reply.
In AMTOR you will get the connect alarm only when the replying
station transmits the "+?" character combination.
The check for the detection of your callsign and the connect alarm
sequence only occur after a line feed character has been received.
Under most conditions in AMTOR, many in RTTY, and some in MORSE,
LAN-LINK will recognize the callsign of the station answering your
CQ and display it in the status window. In the event that it fails
completely, the sequence "--?--" will show up in the status window.
Since the callsign recognition algorithm used just looks for the
first word following the "DE space" sequence and assumes that it has
the callsign, be careful to check it when operating under QRM
conditions. You can override the automatic call selection with the
Enter Callsign command in the Call Menu.
The automatic CQ sequence is canceled when an incoming call is
detected (only if the Beacon or Robot-Mailbox Mode is not selected),
if you push the disconnect command key, the "End" key, F3, or if you
change communications modes.
4.7 Activate Type Ahead Buffer/AMTOR Relink (F7)
This key is not available in the Packet Communications Mode. It
also functions somewhat differently in the AMTOR and other communi-
cations modes as described in the following sections.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 33
4.7.1 Activate Type Ahead Buffer
The use of this key sets LAN-LINK to the "Type Ahead" Mode. This is
necessary for the PK-232 only, the KAM has the feature built in.
(The MFJ1278 does not have it, so the function key is inactive). Any
characters then typed at the keyboard will be placed into the TNC
transmit buffer. The contents of the buffer will be transmitted over
the air when the transmit command is invoked with Function Key 10
[F10].
This feature allows you to "type ahead" as you can enter text into
the transmit buffer while viewing incoming words in the INPUT window
in the screen. Any characters typed from the keyboard will be echoed
in the OUTGOING window on the screen.
4.7.2 AMTOR Relink
If you return to the Command Mode when linked to another station in
AMTOR, use this key to get back to the Converse Mode. If the link
times out, you can try to relink with this key if you have entered
the SELCAL of the other station.
4.8 Disconnect, Disengage or Receive (F8)
This function key returns the station to the receive communications
(TNC command) mode. It may also be used to abort the automatic CQ
sequence. If you use it to abort a CQ sequence while the
transmission is in progress, you may also want to flush the PK-232
transmit buffer by using the Flush command in the TNC Menu or the
Alt-F hot key combination.
In a multi-connect situation the program will prompt you to tell it
which I/O channel to disconnect.
In AMTOR this command key toggles LAN-LINK between the Chirpcopy
Mode (listening to a QSO in progress) and monitoring FEC
transmissions (CQ calls).
4.9 Put TNC in CMD Mode (F9)
This command puts the TNC into the Command Mode. At this time, the
program is transparent and acts as a dumb terminal (except for
placing incoming and outgoing text in the relevant windows). You use
this Mode for overriding any of the TNC default conditions.
(See I told you that you had to read the TNC manual).
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 34
4.10 Put TNC in CONVERSE/Transmit/AMTOR FEC (F10)
This command places the TNC into the transmit or Converse Mode. The
transmitter is turned on and the contents of the transmit buffer are
transmitted. In the non packet communications modes, the outgoing
characters will be echoed back from the TNC and displayed in the
INCOMING window on the CRT as they are transmitted on the air. In
the AMTOR communications modes, this key puts the TNC in the FEC
Mode and turns the transmitter on.
4.11 Alternate Function Keys
These keys transmit the files with the fixed names LAN-LINK.001
through LAN-LINK.010 (the suffix number corresponds to the function
key). These files must be located in the same sub-directory as the
LAN-LINK.EXE program. The transmitter is left on when the file has
been sent.
4.11.1 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.001
4.11.2 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.002
4.11.3 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.003
4.11.4 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.004
4.11.5 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.005
4.11.6 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.006
4.11.7 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.007
4.11.8 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.008
4.11.9 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.009
4.11.10 Send/Talk file LAN-LINK.010
If the Mode File Flag is set (see 10.14), the file names will
change according to the modes.
In the non packet communications modes, the transmitter is left on
when the file has been sent. In AMTOR, the changeover character pair
(+?) is not sent.
4.12 Shift Function Keys
These function keys show the contents of the files with the fixed
names LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 (the suffix number
corresponds to the function key). These files must be located in the
same sub-directory as the LAN-LINK.EXE program.
4.12.1 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.001
4.12.2 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.002
4.12.3 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.003
4.12.4 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.004
4.12.5 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.005
4.12.6 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.006
4.12.7 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.007
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 35
4.12.8 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.008
4.12.9 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.009
4.12.10 Show contents of file LAN-LINK.010
If the Mode File Flag is set (see 10.14), the file names will
change according to the communications modes.
4.13 Control Function Keys
These function keys show the first lines of the files with the
fixed names LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 (the suffix number
corresponds to the function key). These files must be located in the
same sub-directory as the LAN-LINK.EXE program.
If the Mode File Flag is set (see 10.14), the file names will
change according to the modes.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 36
5.0 THE MAIN MENU
When you press the "Escape" Key, the Main Menu shown in Figure 5
appears on your screen and provides you with a number of choices as
described in the following sections. Type in the single letter to
make your choice.
Figure 5 Main Menu
A Quick Menu
B PBBS/PacketCluster Menu
C Call Menu
D eDit Menu
E Event/Clock Menu
F Files Menu
H Help with Function keys
J Jump to DOS Shell
K Lan-linK Menu
L Log Menu
M Message Menu
N TNC Menu
O AMSAT-OSCAR Menu
P Parameter Menu
Q Q Codes [NC/L]
R Kenwood Radio Menu
S communicationS Mode Menu
T Terminal Mode Menu
X eXit LAN-LINK
Z Elmer Menu
Different options will show up in each menu depending on the
connect state (in packet) or the type of TNC that you are using. For
example, if you are using a TNC that only supports packet, the non
packet menus will not be seen. The PBBS Menu is only active when you
are connected to another station.
5.1 The Quick Menu
The Quick Menu shown in Figure 5.1 is designed for new users and
provides the most commonly used functions in a single Menu. Type in
the single letter to make your choice. Each option is described
below.
Figure 5.1 The Quick Menu
A Auto CQ
B Send Brag Tape
C Connect to Someone
I Initialize PK232
L Log
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 37
M Change Mode
Q Call CQ
S Send File
T Send File/Talk
Z QRZ
1..0 Send/Talk 1..10
5.2 Auto CQ
This option initiates the automatic CQ sequence in which LAN-LINK
sends out a CQ call, listens for a reply, and if none is received,
sends out another CQ call, and so on, ad infinitum. It is the same
as using Function Key 6 (F6).
5.3 Send Brag Tape
This option transmits the Brag Tape.
5.4 Call Someone
This option is used when you want to call or connect to another
station.
5.5 initialize TNC
This option is used when you want to initialize the parameters in
your TNC.
5.6 Log Menu
This option invokes the logbook.
5.7 Change Communications Mode
This option invokes the Communications Mode Menu. You use it to
change TNC communications modes.
5.8 Call CQ
This option is used to initiate a single CQ call.
5.9 Send/Talk File
This option is used to send a file. When the file has been sent,
the transmitter will stay on.
5.10 QRZ
This option is the same as using Alt-Q Function Key (Alt-Q).
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 38
5.11 Send/Talk LAN-LINK files 001..010
This option is used to transmit the contents one of the LAN-LINK
buffer files. You select the number, LAN-LINK does the rest. The
option is the same as that provided by the Alternate Function Keys.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 39
6.0 THE PBBS/PacketCluster MENU
The PBBS menu shown in Figure 6 gives you smart file transfer
capabilities with a PBBS and log searching with a PacketCluster. The
menu is only active when you are connected to another packet
station. The options shown/active at any time depend on whether you
are connected to a BBS or a PacketCluster. Type in the single letter
to make your choice.
Figure 6 PBBS/PacketCluster Menu
A Send Announcement
C Zap PacketCluster
D Send DX Alert
D Download Text File
K Turn PacketCluster Mode OFF
L Turn Auto Cluster DX Alert ON/FF
P Zap PBBS
T Talk to Station
X Download Binary File (Xmodem)
Y Download Binary File (Ymodem)
1 Clear All Search Flags
2 Set All Search Flags
3 Set All CW Search Flags
4 Set All SSB Search Flags
5 Set/Clear Individual Search Flags
6 Set/Clear Current Band Search Flags
7 Set Current Band Search Flags ONLY
6.1 Download Text Files
This option lets you download a text file from the PBBS into a
separate text file on your disk. Enter the full PBBS download
command at the prompt line.
To download a file from a W0RLI PBBS such as FILENAME.TYP in the
"A" sub-directory you'd enter "DA FILENAME.TYP". To download the
same file from the PACKET sub-directory of a WA7MBL PBBS you'd enter
the command "D \PACKET\FILENAME.TYP".
If you use the "D" command to download a text file, it will end up
in a separate file on your disk ONLY IF a file of the same name does
not exist on your drive. If a file with the selected name already
exists on your disk drive you will get an error message.
6.2 Download Binary File (Xmodem)
This option lets you download a binary file from the PBBS or other
packet station using the Xmodem protocol into a separate text file
on your disk.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 40
You have to configure the Xmodem Receive Batch file before you use
this command.
When you use this command, you first have to tell the PBBS the name
of the file you are going to download, and then bring up this option
to tell LAN-LINK that a binary file is on its way. LAN-LINK uses an
external binary file transfer protocol to do the actual file.
6.3 Download Binary File (Ymodem)
This option lets you download a binary file from the PBBS or other
packet station using the Ymodem protocol into a separate text file
on your disk.
You have to configure the Ymodem Receive Batch file, before you use
this command.
When you use this command, you first have to tell the PBBS the name
of the file you are going to download, and then bring up this option
to tell LAN-LINK that a binary file is on its way. LAN-LINK uses an
external binary file transfer protocol to do the actual file.
6.4 Zap PacketCluster
This option is the same as the Alt-K function key.
6.5 Zap PBBS
This option is the same as the Alt-Z function key.
6.6 Turn PacketCluster Mode ON/OFF
This option turns the PacketCluster Mode Flag ON and OFF. If the
flag is on LAN-LINK will scan the incoming lines for a DX-Alert
message.
You may monitor a PacketCluster in the TRAFFIC mode without
connecting to it. When a DX Alert shows up, it is sent to each
connected station in turn. LAN-LINK will only interpret the first
one.
LAN-LINK displays the parts of the DX Alert message in different
colors. The colors correspond to the Multi String Colors, shown in
the color option in the Parameter Menu.
6.7 Send DX Alert Message
This option is the same as the Alt-K function key. Use it AFTER you
have made the contact.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 41
If you have a valid Radio, LAN-LINK will read the frequency from
the Radio. If not, LAN-LINK will prompt you to enter the frequency.
LAN-LINK will then prompt for the call of the DX Station, and will
assume that you want to send the call of the one you have just
logged.
6.8 Clear All Search Flags
This option clears all the band search flags. LAN-LINK will not
check any bands. These options are provided for fast temporary
changes when working a contest.
6.9 Set All Search Flags
This option sets all the band search flags. LAN-LINK will check
every band.
6.10 Set All CW Search Flags
This option sets all the CW band search flags. LAN-LINK will check
every CW band.
6.11 Set All SSB Search Flags
This option sets all the SSB band search flags. LAN-LINK will check
every SSB band.
6.12 Set/Clear Individual Band Search Flags
This option prompts you to set or clear each flag for each band.
6.13 Set/Clear Current Band Search Flags
This option allows you to set or clear the search flags for the
band you are operating on. Use this option and the "clear all"
option in a contest to change settings when changing bands.
Notes:
1: Use the Update option in the Parameter Menu to save the state
of the individual flags permanently.
2: Set the debug flag on, to verify the prefix, if you are think
LAN-LINK is incorrect in its searches.
6.14 Turn Auto Cluster DX Alert ON/OFF
If this flag is set, LAN-LINK will prompt you to send a
PacketCluster DX alert AFTER you log a contact.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 42
6.15 Send DX Alert
This option is same as the function performed by the Alt-K
function key. The sequence is as follows.
If the radio interface is active, LAN-LINK will read the radio vfo
frequency, other wise lan-link will prompt you to enter the
frequency. LAN-LINK will then prompt you for the callsign of the
other station, default being the one you logged, then ask you for a
comment to add. LAN-LINK will then transmit the DX alert.
If you are connected, the DX alert will be transmitted once in the
format expected by the PacketCluster. If you are not connected, it
will be broadcast as an unconnected packet in the same format as the
packetcluster message. The number of times that the unconnected
packet will be transmitted is determined by the CQ line counter
parameter (LAN-LINK.SYS line 48).
6.16 Send Announcement (connected to a PacketCluster and using a
dual port TNC)
This option prompts you for the text of the announcement then
transmits it to the PacketCluster with an 'A ' prefix.
6.17 Talk to Station (connected to a PacketCluster and using a dual
port TNC)
This option prompts you for the callsign and the text then
transmits them to the PacketCluster with a 'T ' prefix. Leave a
space character between the callsign and the text. This option is
for a one line message only.
6.18 Set Current Band Search Flags ONLY
This option sets the current CW and SSB band search flags, and
clears all others. Use it when changing hf radio bands, if you are
not interested in hearing about activity on other bands.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 43
7.0 THE CALL MENU
The call menu is used to enter calls, either to call/connect/link a
station or to remember a call or path. Each time you are prompted
for a call, LAN-LINK will remember the previous 15 calls and you may
use the Up and Down arrows to move the cursor to a remembered call.
If you wish to capture a call from the incoming text window, push
Function Key 10 (F10) to enter the incoming text window and move the
cursor to the desired callsign. When the cursor is positioned on any
character in the callsign, push the "Enter" Key and that word will
be recognized as the callsign. Any characters joined to the call
(such as a ".") will be picked up as part of the call. If the cursor
is positioned on a space or blank, the connect attempt will be
inhibited.
In AMTOR, whenever you are asked to enter a callsign, LAN-LINK will
prompt you with its guess at the SELCAL. If you agree with it, just
press the "Enter" Key, if you disagree, enter your choice over the
prompt version.
The Call Menu is communications mode sensitive. It gives you
different choices in each communications mode. In the packet
communications mode it provides the choices shown in Figure 7.1. In
AMTOR, it provides the choices shown in Figure 7.2. Type in the
single letter to make your choice.
Figure 7.1 The Packet Mode Call Menu
A Alert Call
D Show Directory
M ReMember Path
P Packet Cluster
T Target Call
Q Call CQ
U aUto CQ
! Zap PBBS [on Beacon]
Figure 7.2 AMTOR Mode Call Menu
D Show Directory
F Turn CQ File ON/OFF
Q Call CQ
U aUto CQ
X Turn DX ON
7.1 Alert Call
This option toggles the Alert call feature ON and OFF. If it is
off, you are prompted for the call to be monitored, and, if it is
on, it is turned off. The toggle is set when you enter a callsign,
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 44
and cleared when you depress the "Enter" Key instead of a callsign.
The Alert call will be shown flashing in the status window when in
the disconnected state.
The Alert call feature is used in the Packet Communications Mode
when disconnected and the terminal set for "TRFC" or "CQ/BEACON".
LAN-LINK will scan the packet headers received from the TNC, and,
when it sees a packet originated (or digipeated if the MRPT
parameter in the TNC is set to "ON"), by the station whose call you
have entered as the "Alert" call, it will sound an alarm at the
console. The line containing the packet header will also be
displayed in the Alert call color. If the terminal is set for
"CQ/BEACON" the Alert will only sound if the specified station
transmits CQ or BEACON packets.
7.2 ReMember Path
You may use this option to put an entry in the LAN-LINK.DIR file.
7.3 Call CQ
You use this command key to call CQ. In the Packet Communications
Mode, the TNC will transmit a line of text along with the CQ packet.
The line of text is in line 3 of the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
In the AMTOR Communications Mode, your SELCAL will be transmitted
along with the CQ call in the FEC Mode.
7.4 Show Contents of Call Directory
This option displays the contents of the call directory file (LAN-
LINK.DIR). Use this option to verify the contents of the file.
7.5 Target Call
This option toggles the Target call feature ON and OFF. If it is
off, you are prompted for the callsign to be detected. If it is on,
it is turned off. The toggle is set when you enter a callsign, and
cleared when you press the "Enter" Key instead of a callsign.
The Target call feature is used in the Packet Communications Mode
when disconnected. LAN-LINK will monitor the stations connecting to
you. When it sees a connect by the station which you have entered as
the "Target" call, it will set the flashing Connect Count display to
show a "happy face". The Target call will be shown flashing in the
status window when in the disconnected state.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 45
7.6 Auto CQ
This option is the same as Function Key 6 (F6).
7.7 Toggle DX Flag
LAN-LINK allows you to call either "CQ" or "CQ DX". If this flag is
set, all CQ calls will be to "CQ DX". If it is cleared, all CQ calls
will be plain CQ's.
7.8 Zap PBBS on Next Mail Beacon
This option causes LAN-LINK to Zap your local PBBS next time it
beacons with a list of calls for which it has Mail. You set this
option active when you want to upload a set of messages, or are not
sure if there are any messages waiting for you on the PBBS. A
typical situation is where there are a lot of NTS messages stacked
up in the PBBS.BBS file waiting to go. This parameter will be reset
when the connect goes through, so if the Zap attempt failed, it will
try again on the following Mail beacon. This will not work in the
Multi-user mode.
7.9 Turn CQ File ON/OFF
This option is active in the non-packet communications modes. In
the packet mode use the Metabeacon (see Appendix 2 Section 17.3.3).
This option allows you to turn the non packet mode CQ file
transmit flag ON and OFF. If the flag is set, the CQ file (See
Appendix 3 Section 17.0) will be transmitted, if the flag is
cleared, the file will not be transmitted.
Each time LAN-LINK sends out a non packet CQ call it tests for the
presence of the CQ file. If the CQ file exists, LAN-LINK will
transmit the CQ file when you call 'CQ' after transmitting built in
the CQ lines. This feature allows you to customize CQ calls. There
is one CQ file for each mode. The CQ files are named as MODE.CQ,
e.g. BAUDOT.CQ, PACTOR.CQ, etc. You can temporarily override the
default name.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 46
8.0 EDIT MENU
LAN-LINK contains an ASCII text editor suitable for small files. It
is based on Borland's Turbo Pascal Editor Toolbox and the commands
are compatible with Sidekick and Wordstar. Each time you invoke the
editor, LAN-LINK checks that enough RAM exists to contain the file
to be edited. If you do not have enough RAM, LAN-LINK will give you
an Error Message.
The Edit Menu is shown in Figure 8-1. Type in the single letter to
make your choice.
Figure 8-1 The Typical Edit Menu
A LAN-LINK.OUT
B LAN-LINK.TXT
D LAN-LINK.DIR
E Pick dEmo File to Edit
F Any other File
G Incoming Message
K Answer Capture-to-disk file
L Leave Messages >> N4QQ
M Answer Incoming Mail
N Leave Note
O Pick OUT File to Edit
P Pick Ctdsk File to Edit
Q Edit CQ File
R Capture-to-disk file
S LAN-LINK.SYS
T Two Files
Z LAN-LINK.DMO
1,2 - 0 LAN-LINK.001 - 010
A summary of the commands used in the Editor is presented in Figure
8-2. The ^ sign in front of a character identifies that character as
a "Control" character. To activate it, hold down the Control key AND
the character key. Some of the commands require two keystrokes. Use
^P to embed a control character in the text. For example, if you are
creating a file containing commands to be sent to the TNC, to enter
a Control-C character into the file, use the ^P^C sequence of
keystrokes.
Figure 8-2 Summary of Editor Commands
F10 Switch Windows (if more than one window open)
Backspace Delete left char
Del Delete Char
Enter New line
Ins Toggle Insert mode
PgUp Move cursor up one page
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 47
PgDn Move cursor down one page
^A Move cursor left one word
^C Move cursor down one page
^D Move cursor right one character
^E Move cursor up one line
^F Move cursor right one word
^G Delete one character
^H Delete left one character
^I Tab
^L Find/replace next occurrence
^P Insert a control character into the text
^M New line
^N Insert line
^R Move cursor up one page
^S Move cursor left one character
^T Delete one word after cursor
^V Toggle insert mode
^W Scroll up
^X Move cursor down one line
^Y Delete line at cursor
^Z Scroll down
^K^B Mark beginning of block
^K^C Copy block to position of cursor
^K^D Save file and exit edit
^K^H Hide block marker
^K^K Mark end of block
^K^Q Abandon file and exit edit
^K^R Read file into screen
^K^T Mark single word as block
^K^V Move block to position of cursor
^K^W Write block to disk file
^K^Y Delete block
^K 1..9 Set marker 1 .. 9
^Q^A Find text and replace
^Q^B Move to beginning of block
^Q^C Move to end of file
^Q^D Move to right of line
^Q^E Move to top of window
^Q^F Find text
^Q^I Toggle autoindent mode
^Q^K Move to end of block
^Q^R Move to top of file
^Q^S Move to left of line
^Q^X Move to bottom of window
^Q^Y Delete to end of line
^Q 1..9 Jump to marker 1..9
The following options can be set in the Find/Find and Replace (^Qf
and ^Qa) operations.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 48
# locates #th occurrence
G global replace
N replace without Y/N question
U ignore upper case/lower case
W match whole words only
While you are using the editor, LAN-LINK can't receive and process
characters from the TNC. All other features are inhibited or locked
out. Thus if someone connects to you, the TNC will know but LAN-LINK
will not. Be warned!!!
The Edit menu allows you to call up the various files for editing as
follows.
8.1 Edit Brag Tape
This option allows you to create and edit the Brag Tape File (LAN-
LINK.TXT).
8.2 Edit Call Directory File
This option allows you to create and edit the Call Directory File
(LAN-LINK.DIR).
8.3 Edit Any Other File
This option allows you to create and edit any other file.
8.4 Answer Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File (Split Screen)
This option allows you to edit the capture-to-disk file and reply
to incoming bulletins/messages in a split screen mode. The contents
of the incoming bulletins and messages will be displayed in the top
window, and the reply file in the lower window.
The reply file is assumed to be named according to the Zap
convention (*.BBS file). You will have to set up the replies/-
outgoing messages as if you were typing them by hand.
You put "SP Call @ PBBS" in the first line, then the "Subject of
the message" in the next. Enter the message, and end it with ":EOF:"
, "/ex" or "/EX" as the first word on a separate line. For example,
a message to me could take the form shown below.
SP G3ZCZ@N4QQ
Test
This is a test
/EX
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 49
8.5 Answer Incoming Messages (Split Screen)
This option allows you to answer incoming messages in a split
screen mode. The contents of the incoming messages will be displayed
in the top window, and the reply file in the lower window. The reply
file is assumed to be named according to the Zap convention (LOCAL-
BBS.BBS file). Reply messages are set up as described in Section
8.4.
Use Function key 10 (F10) to switch windows. At this time you
cannot transfer text between windows.
8.6 Leave Note for Someone
In all modes you can leave a brief note (message) for another
station. When you invoke this option, you will be prompted for the
call of the station that you want to leave a note for. As you enter
the text it is stored on the disk in the usual format.
After you have left the note, if you are in the Packet Communi-
cations Mode, press Function Key 8 (F8) or Alt-D to load the
callsign of the recipient into the beacon.
When you leave a note, leave it for the root call of the connectee,
for example to leave a note for G3ZCZ/W3 leave it for G3ZCZ,
similarly to leave a note for WB8WKA-1 leave it for WB8WKA. LAN-LINK
is smart enough to extract the root call from any callsign it
links/connects with.
8.7 Edit Capture-to-Disk file
This option allows you to edit the Capture-to-Disk file as long as
it is smaller than 64k.
8.8 Edit Two Files (Split Screen)
This option allows you to create and edit any two files. Use
Function Key 10 (F10) to switch windows. At this time you cannot
transfer text between windows.
8.9 Edit Configuration file
This option allows you to edit the Configuration File (LAN-
LINK.SYS).
8.10 Edit LAN-LINK.001 through LAN-LINK.010 files
This option allows you to create and edit the 10 files (LAN-
LINK.001 to LAN-LINK.010). Use the suffix number to access the
respective LAN-LINK.* file, use the number 0 to access the LAN-
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 50
LINK.010 file. If the Mode File Flag is set (see 10.14), the file
names will change according to the modes.
8.11 Pick Capture-to-disk File to Edit
This option presents you with a directory window containing a list
of capture-to-disk files (YYMMDD.RUN). Move the cursor down to the
desired file and touch the "Enter" key. If you don't want to edit
any of them, then move the cursor down to a blank line. If you have
more files than one screen full, use the Pgdn (Page Down) key to
show the next screen full.
8.12 Pick Message file to Edit
This option presents you with a directory window containing a list
of message files (*.OUT). Move the cursor down to the desired
message file and touch the "Enter" key. If you don't want to edit
any of them, then move the cursor down to a blank line. If you have
more files than one screen full, use the Pgdn (Page Down) key to
show the next screen full.
8.13 Leave Messages on your local PBBS
This option allows you to edit your LOCAL-BBS.BBS file in a single
window.
8.14 Edit Incoming Message
This option allows you to edit your incoming message file in a
single window.
8.15 Edit LAN-LINK.OUT File
This option allows you to edit the LAN-LINK.OUT file.
8.16 Edit LAN-LINK.DMO File
This option allows you to edit the Demo or Test file. This is a
file you can read into LAN-LINK and LAN-LINK treats it as if the
data came from the TNC. Use this option to customize a file to test
features and custom settings.
8.17 Pick dEmo File to Edit
This option allows you to pick a Demo file to edit.
8.18 Edit CQ File
This option allows you to edit the CQ file (Section 7.9)
associated with the communications mode in which you are operating.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 51
9.0 EVENT/CLOCK MENU
LAN-LINK contains some time dependent features which allow you to
schedule events. These features are controlled from the Event/Clock
Menu shown in Figure 9. Type in the single letter to make your
choice.
Figure 9 Event/Clock Menu
A Set Alarm
C Connect ?
D Display Event
P Periodic Connect ?
R Turn Robot ON/OFF
S Turn ConteSt ON/OFF
T Turn Time Display ON/OFF
X Cancel Event
Z Zap PBBS
To set a scheduled event, first select the event, then enter the
time. You may set the event to occur once a day, or once an hour. If
you wish the event to occur once an hour, enter an hour value
greater than 23 when asked to enter the hour. Each time the event
occurs, the feature will be cleared.
9.1 Set Alarm
This option allows you to set an alarm clock.
9.2 Connect
This option allows you to set LAN-LINK to issue a call or connect
request at some later time.
9.3 Display Event
This option allows you to display the scheduled event.
9.4 Periodic Event
This option allows you to set a periodic connect request or call
event. You can set the start time, the end time and the time
interval between the connect/call attempts. The first connect that
goes through will clear the event scheduler.
9.5 Turn Robot ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the AMTOR/Packet Robot on or off at
a fixed time.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 52
9.6 Turn Automatic Contester ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the AMTOR/Packet Automatic Contester
on or off at a fixed time. You will be prompted for the time, a
starting QSO number (in case you a restarting the contest) and the
Contest Text (in case you wish to change it).
9.7 Turn Time Display ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the clock display on or off.
9.8 Cancel Event
This option allows you to cancel a scheduled event.
9.9 Zap PBBS
This option allows you to schedule a PBBS Zap at a predetermined
time (like in the middle of the night). You may for example set it
to attempt to connect to a PBBS at a fixed time or hourly at any
desired minute after the hour. Should the connect be made, the event
scheduler will be cleared and no further connect attempts will be
made.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 53
10.0 FILES MENU
The Files Menu is shown in Figure 10. Type in the single letter to
make your choice.
Figure 10 The Files Menu
B Send Brag Tape
C View Color File
D File Directory
E Erase File
F priNt File
M Turn Mode Files ON/OFF
N priNt Ctdsk File
P Pick Ctdsk File to View
R Rename File
S Send File
T Send/Talk File
U send Uppercase File
V View File
Y View Capture-to-disk File
X Turn eXpand Files ON/OFF
Z View Messages
10.1 Send Brag Tape
This command allows you to transmit a standard text file
historically known as a "Brag Tape". The default name of the brag
tape file is LAN-LINK.TXT, and it should be created with a word
processor in the non-document mode, or with LAN-LINK's editor.
During the file transfer, the outgoing text will appear in the
Outwindow. If the text is long enough and fills the TNC buffer, you
will see it stop, and then continue when the TNC is ready to accept
more text. LAN-LINK uses hardware flow control not "^S/^Q."
When you transmit a file you are returned to the receive mode after
the file is sent except in the Packet Communications Mode. In the
Packet Communications mode, when the file has been loaded into the
TNC the computer will add the ^Z character to the outgoing text to
signal to the recipient that the file transmission is over.
The computer will signal you (using the bell character) when the
file has been loaded into the TNC. That is not the same as the time
that the TNC has transmitted the file, because the TNC contains a
character buffer. LAN-LINK dumps the file into the TNC at the baud
rate used between the PC and the TNC. The TNC, then transmits the
file at the radio link data rate. Flow control is used to regulate
the passage of data between the various buffers in the link.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 54
10.2 File Directory
This command shows you the directory of the disk drive.
10.3 Erase File
This command allows you to erase or delete a file.
10.4 Pick Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File to View
This command allows you to view a *.RUN file. When you exercise
this command you will be presented with a list of capture-to-disk
files (YYMMDD.RUN). Move the cursor down to the one you want to view
and touch the "Enter" key to select it. Use this option, if you
must, on long files. On files containing less than 64k characters,
use the Edit Menu.
10.5 Rename File
This command allows you to rename a file. You could for example
rename a document file to a "CALLSIGN.OUT" file so that someone will
receive it automatically next time they connect.
10.6 Send File
This option lets you transmit an ASCII file. In the non packet
modes, it will turn the transmitter off after sending the file. In
the packet mode it will send a ^Z character after sending the file.
10.7 Send/Talk File
This option lets you transmit an ASCII file. In the non packet
modes, it will leave the transmitter on after sending the file.
10.8 Send Uppercase File
This option lets you transmit an ASCII file and converts each line
of text in the file to UPPERCASE before transmitting it. The file
itself is not changed. In the non packet modes, it will turn the
transmitter off after sending the file.
10.9 View file
This option lets you view the contents of a file. Use it if you
must on long files. On files containing less than 64k characters,
use the Edit Menu.
10.10 View Capture-to-disk (Ctdsk) File
This option lets you scroll forward through, or view, the contents
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 55
of the capture-to-disk file (YYMMDD.RUN) which you specify by name.
Use it if you must, on long files. On files containing less than 64k
characters, use the Edit Menu.
10.11 View Incoming Message File
This option lets you view the contents the Incoming message file
(yourcall.OUT). Use it if you must, on long files. On files
containing less than 64k characters, use the Edit Menu.
10.12 Print File
This option lets you print the contents of a text file.
10.13 View Color File
This option allows you to view an ANSI color file in glorious
color. If you use the regular edit or file view options, you will
see the ANSI color control characters inside the file. Use this
option to check on your color editing.
10.14 Turn Mode Files ON/OFF
This option lets you change the state of the Mode File Flag. If
this flag is set, LAN-LINK will change the name of the LAN-LINK.001
to LAN-LINK.010 when you change modes. The name will change to the
mode followed by a number, i.e. BAUDOT.001 to BAUDOT.002, or
AMTOR.001 to AMTOR.002. This feature allows you to use different
files in different modes and still use the same Alt key combination
to transmit them. Thus, you can if you wish, set up a Pactor file
with all 128 characters, and an AMTOR file with the AMTOR character
set as MODE.002, (where MODE is the communications mode) and
transmit each using Alt-F2. If the Mode File Flag is not set, then
the file names never change.
10.15 Turn Expand Files ON/OFF
This option lets you change the state of the Expand File Flag. If
this flag is ON, LAN-LINK will replace the macro characters with
QSO specific values in the outgoing text, as described in Section
18.13 when you transmit a file.
The macro characters allow you to set up bragtapes and contest text
exchanges whose contents appear to change in each QSO.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 56
11.0 HELP WITH FUNCTION KEYS
This Main menu option will activate the HELP display which presents
you with a (very) brief reminder summary of the function and hot
keys. This window will remain on display until a character is typed
at the keyboard.
12.0 JUMP TO DOS SHELL
This Main menu option allows you to enter a DOS shell. If you do
not restore the system to the directory which contains LAN-LINK
before you EXIT from the shell, LAN-LINK will do so for you.
You may use the DOS shell while in QSO when you have loaded the
computer/TNC output buffers and output will continue to flow.
To exit from the DOS shell back to LAN-LINK, enter the command
"EXIT". LAN-LINK will automatically return you to the correct sub-
directory.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 57
13.0 LAN-LINK MENU
The LAN-LINK menu provides different options depending on whether
you are connected to another station or not. Figure 13.1 shows
options that are available when connected. Figure 13.2 shows the
menu when not connected. In each case, type in the single letter to
make your choice.
Figure 13.1 LAN-LINK PBBS Menu When Connected
B :QBU: Protocol
D :QZD: Binary File
G :QIC: Page Operator
H :QMH: Activity
M :QBM: ASCII File
P :QSP: Message
Q :QDB: ASCII File
R :QTR: Ask for Time
S :QSM: Message
T :QTA: Message
U :QRU: Messages
Z :QZU: Binary File
2 Select Dual Inwindows
9 Demo Mode
Figure 13.2 LAN-LINK Menu When Not Connected
9 Demo Mode
W Who is "ON-LINE"
2 Select Dual Inwindows
Each of the features (except the :QBU:) may also be performed
manually by typing the full sequence of Network Control Language
character strings.
13.1 :QBU: External Protocol Command
This is a Sequence for external operations. It requires that the
batch file "QBU-TX.BAT" be present in the transmitting (initiating)
station, and the batch file "QBU-RX.BAT" be present in the receiving
station. When the QBU sequence is executed the following occurs:-
The transmitting station sends a :QBU: The receiving station sends
a :QRV: and the amount of memory left on disk, enters the
transparent mode, jumps to dos and executes the batch file "QBU-
RX.BAT".
Upon receipt of the :QRV:, the transmitting station then puts the
TNC in the transparent mode and jumps to Dos and executes the batch
file "QBU-TX.BAT". The batch file should exit and return to LAN-
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 58
LINK. LAN-LINK then exits the transparent mode.
When the receiving station batch file finishes and returns to LAN-
LINK. LAN-LINK then exits the transparent mode and transmits a :QSL:
if the DOS Error level was 0 and a :QNO: error if it wasn't. At this
time both stations are back in the converse mode.
You may use this technique for transmitting pure binary files using
external (to LAN-LINK) protocols). You may change the default names
of the batch files in the LAN-LINK.SYS configuration file.
13.2 :QBM: ASCII File
You use this option to download an ASCII file from another LAN-LINK
station. It is the same as manually typing ":QBM: FILENAME".
13.3 :QSM: Message
You use this option to request a repeat of a message. It is the
same as manually typing ":QSM:".
13.4 :QSP: Message
You use this option to store a message on another LAN-LINK station.
It is the same as manually typing ":QSP: CALLSIGN".
LAN-LINK contains store and forward routines for messages in a
Local Area Network (LAN).
When connected to another LAN-LINK station, you may use the NC/L
:QSP: command to leave a message at that station. This QSP command
automates that feature for you. It lets you just enter the callsign
of the station you wish to leave a message for. It will then send
the text sequence :QSP: <callsign>. The other LAN-LINK HOST station
will either reply :QNO: followed by a number or :QRV: <callsign>.
The "QNO" message means that the other computer cannot accept the
message, the "QRV" message means that it is waiting for you to send
it.
If you get the :QRV: reply, go ahead and type the message, or send
the text file containing the message. If you type the message, use a
Control-Z (^Z) character and carriage return to terminate the
message. (In AMTOR, LAN-LINK will translate the ^Z to :EOF: +? to
terminate the message). You will then receive either a :QSL: from
the other station meaning that the message is accepted, or a :QNO:
followed by a message that something went wrong and the message was
not stored.
13.5 :QDB: ASCII File
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 59
You use this option to upload an ASCII file to another LAN- LINK
station. It is the same as manually typing ":QDB: FILENAME". Using
this option saves you typing the file name twice.
13.6 :QRU: Messages
The NC/L QRU command allows you to upload a number of messages to
the other station. You use it when you have messages pending on your
system and want to pass them to a third computer for storage in the
LAN, while you take your computer off-line.
You use this option to begin the upload sequence to transfer
messages for a number of stations to another LAN-LINK station. It is
the same as manually typing :QRU:.
You can only use this option with a station which you have
previously designated as a store and forward mail box, for specific
stations. You must also have set up a CALLSIGN.MBX file for that
station.
When the upload sequence is over, the computer sending the messages
will transmit the NC/L command word :QJG: to signal that the
sequence is complete. Should you receive it before you get any
messages, then there weren't any pending.
If you want to upload messages to another LAN-LINK system, connect
to it and type the sequence :QRU: followed by the "Enter" character.
That system will then respond to you as if the operator there had
initiated a QRU command.
13.7 :QTA: Messages
If you have a bad path and your messages are not automatically
deleted by the other station after they have been sent to you, you
use this option to delete your message. It is the same as manually
typing ":QTA:".
13.8 :QZD: Binary Files
This command uses the external batch files to download a Binary
file from another LAN-LINK Station using the Zmodem Protocol. If you
attempt to download a file which exists in your computer, LAN-LINK
will use ZModem's "restore after interrupt" capability to pick up
the transfer at the point when (it assumes) the transfer was
interrupted. You must configure all four QZ*.BAT files before trying
to :QZD: as described in Section 24 (Install takes care of the
configuration in most instances).
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 60
13.9 :QZU: Binary Files
This command uses the external batch files to Upload a Binary file
to another LAN-LINK Station, making use of the Zmodem Protocol. LAN-
LINK will not let you upload a file to the other system, if a file
with that name already exists on the system. This stops you
overwriting existing files. If the link drops out while you are
uplinking a file, and you wish to try again later, rename the file
you are sending, then reconnect and try again. Don't forget to :QSP:
the other station and tell the operator what happened. You must
configure all four QZ*.BAT files before trying to :QZU: as described
in Section 24.
13.10 :QIC: Page Operator
This command allows you to page the operator at the other LAN-LINK
2.10+ station. The sequence is:- you send :QIC: to another LAN-LINK
2.10 station. Use the LAN-LINK Menu or type it by hand. Upon
receipt, LAN-LINK begins to page the operator if the sound flag is
on. At that time it sends you a :QRX: followed by a number, i.e.
':QRX: 30'. The number is the number of seconds it will page the
operator. At the end of the paging sequence it will send the prompt
i.e. 'G3ZCZ>'. If the sound is inhibited it will send ':QRX: QRT' to
signal that it is in a silent configuration.
13.11 :QMH: Monitor Heard
This command causes your copy of LAN-LINK to issue the :QMH:
command. When the other station's copy of LAN-LINK receives a :QMH:
command, it drops back to the TNC Command Mode and issues a "MH"
command to the TNC (except to a TNC1 which does not support it). It
stores the list received in a temporary buffer, and then returns to
the Converse Mode and transmits the list back to you.
13.12 :QTR: Ask for Time
This command allows you to get the date-time-text string from the
other LAN-LINK 2.10+ station. Don't confuse it with :QRT:.
13.13 :QRA: Who is "ON-LINE"
You use this option (when unconnected and monitoring the traffic on
a channel) to see who is "ON-LINE" on the LAN. It is the same as
going manually into the Converse Mode and transmitting an
unconnected packet containing the character string :QRA:. You may
also use the Alt-W function key to transmit the same sequence.
13.14 Demo Mode
Use this option to enter the demo mode, and simulate incoming lines
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 61
of text from a disk file. LAN-LINK will treat any lines of text in
the Demo file as if they were received off-the-air. This feature
allows you to test many of the features without needing another
station to transmit the trigger signals (for that feature).
13.15 Set Single/Dual PK-900/DSP 2232 In Windows
This option is only active for the PK-900 and DSP-2232. It allows
you to separate the incoming text from the two radio ports into two
windows. When operating hf/vhf the hf window is usually the middle
incoming window.
13.16 Switch IN Windows (Dual port TNC only)
This option is active for the PK-900 and DSP-2232 and only when
the dual incoming windows are active (non-packet communications
modes). It allows you to change the windows in which the incoming
data is displayed.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 62
14.0 LOG MENU
LAN-LINK 2.10+ allows you to have up to 3 logbooks on-line. One is
designated as the HF logbook, the second is the VHF logbook, and the
last one is known as the Secondary Logbook. They can be different or
the same.
LAN-LINK performs automatic log book entries for Packet and AMTOR
Beacon mode Connects, and semi-automatic log book entries for other
modes. The Log files are in dBASE 3 format and can be processed by
the DBASE Log book Package in PC-HAM for indexed listings, tracking
of DXCC and other AWARDS, etc. This is ideal for special event
stations and DX-peditions, for the whole QSL process and further
statistical analyses of their operation. The structure of the
logbook files are as shown in Table 14.
Table 14 Structure of the Logbook Database File
Field Field Name Type Length
1 DATE Character 8
2 TIME Character 4
3 BAND Character 3
4 CALL Character 10
5 RX Character 3
6 TX Character 3
7 MODE Character 4
8 POWER Character 4
9 QSLSENT Character 1
10 QSLRX Character 1
11 COMMENTS Character 20
QSLSENT contains 1 character for information about any QSL sent
out. Use the following notation in this column:
B sent via the bureau
D sent direct.
M sent via the QSL manager
X someone you don't want to send a card to for some reason.
QSLRX contains 1 character for any QSL received information. Use
the following notation in this column:
R card received.
You will notice that a blank in the QSL status (sent or received)
is shown as a '-'. This character may be used in the future in
various modules within the PC-HAM logging package.
The size of the COMMENTS field is a compromise. Each field is a
fixed size so that each log entry takes up a minimum of 62
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 63
characters worth of space on the disk even if all the character
space is unused. You may change the size of the field if you wish,
but to do that you will have to use dBASE. Note also, that if you do
make the comments field longer, the display will be screwed up.
For the logging feature to work, the logbook files must be present
on the disk.
When an AMTOR beacon mode, Pactor, or packet connect occurs, the
connect is automatically logged (if the automatic logging feature is
enabled). In the Packet Mode, the connect path is placed in the
comments section of the logbook entry. In the non packet modes, the
log data entry is set up for you with default 599 values for the
reports exchanged.
When you bring up the Logbook you will be shown the last screen or
page of log entries. The last entry will be highlighted. At this
time a number of function keys can be used, or you may depress the
"Escape" key to bring up the Main Log Menu. When you bring up the
Main Log Menu, it provides the choices shown in Figure 14.1. Type in
the single letter to make your choice.
Figure 14.1 The Log Menu
A Append from Another LAN-LINK Log
B Scan Log by Band
C Change Log
D Delete Logbook
F Find date
G Purge Log
H Help Function Keys
I Import From G3ZCZ's Contest Log
J Jump to an Entry
K PicK Log
L pack Logbook
M Scan Log by Mode
N Create New Blank Log
P Print Log
Q QSL Menu
R Re-index Logbook
T Sort on Date + Time
U Turn Update Disk OFF
Z fuZzy scan
2 Turn Secondary Search OFF
Note: If you see error 601 or similar messages in the logbook, or
LAN-LINK tells you a callsign is not in the logbook when you
know it is, re-index the logbook.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 64
14.1 Append From Another LAN-LINK Log
This option lets you append entries from another LAN-LINK logbook.
Use it after a contest, to merge the contest log into the main
logbook.
14.2 Scan Log by Band
This option lets you scan the logbook file and display QSOs made on
a particular band.
14.3 Change Logbook File
This option lets you temporarily change the logbook file. If you
want to change it permanently, update the LAN-LINK.SYS file via the
Parameters Menu. When you enter the new name, LAN-LINK will assume
that it is a filetype DBF. For example, if you have different
logbooks for different operations on-line, such as 4X.DBF or W8.DBF,
you only need answer "4X" in response to the question, to change to
the 4X.DBF logbook. In accordance with the dBASE convention, you
cannot use any filetype other than DBF.
14.4 Delete Logbook File
This option lets you delete both the logbook (.DBF) and its
associated index file (.NDX).
14.5 Find Date
This option lets you locate and move the highlight to entries for a
particular date. If no entries are found for the desired date, the
first entry after that date will be highlighted. You can also scan
for parts of a date, such as "90/01", for the first entry in January
1990.
14.6 Purge Log
This command allows you to purge one callsign from the log. Use it
to delete the callsign of your local PBBS if the logbook file gets
too big. Enter an '*' to purge all calls from the logbook.
14.7 Help Function Keys
This option brings up a menu listing the log mode function keys.
14.8 Import From G3ZCZ's Contest Log
This option lets you import logs from earlier releases of LAN-LINK
(up to and including Version 1.56). It can also be used to import a
log generated by Contest Program in PC-HAM.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 65
14.9 Jump to an Entry
This option lets you jump to an entry by its record number. This is
the number displayed in the first column.
14.10 Pick a Log file
This command allows you to pick a *.DBF file. When you exercise
this command you will be presented with a list of log files (*.DBF).
Move the cursor down to the one you want to use and touch the
"Enter" key to select it.
14.11 Pack a Logbook
This function key allows you to pack the logbook files. All entries
marked for deletion will really be deleted at this time.
14.12 Scan Log by Mode
This option lets you scan the logbook file and display QSOs made
using a particular mode.
14.13 Create a New Logbook
This command allows you to create a blank logbook (*.DBF) file.
14.14 Print Log
This command prints the contents of the logbook file in a formatted
manner to the printer.
14.15 Re-index a Logbook
This command allows you to index logbooks that you have ported over
from other DBASE formats, or to re-index logbooks that have had
their index files damaged in some manner. You damage the index if
you edit the key (i.e. the callsign) in an entry.
14.16 Sort on Date + Time
This command allows to you create a new logbook from the current
one with the entries is sequential order sorted on date and time.
You use this option after entering old QSOs manually. Make sure
there is space on the disk for a temporary logbook before evoking
this operation.
14.17 Turn Update Disk ON/OFF
If this parameter is set ON, LAN-LINK will close the logbook and
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 66
re-open it after every entry. If the parameter is set OFF, LAN-LINK
saves a few entries in memory and only writes them to disk when the
buffer fills, or the logbook is closed. Setting the parameter
guarantees you will not lose any entries if the power fails, at the
expense of a slightly slower logging operation.
14.18 Fuzzy Scan
This option allows you to scan the callsign or the comment field
(your choice) for a character string. For example you could scan the
comments field for all entries with the word "Joe". You could scan
the callsigns for all calls with the suffix of "ZCZ".
14.19 Turn Secondary Search ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the secondary search mode on and
off. If it is on, and if the secondary logbook exists, every time
you command a search of the logbook to find a prefix or callsign,
LAN-LINK will also search the secondary log. Use this feature if you
have more than one log, as a result of operating from more than one
location or for any other reason.
14.20 Log Menu Function Keys
The Function Keys shown in Figure 14.2 are active in the Log book.
The operation of each function key is described below.
Figure 14.2 Function Keys Active in Log book
A Append Entry
E Edit Log Entry
H Scan for Log Entry
P Change Print Lines
Q QSL entry
S Scan for Call
U Toggle Delete Mark
X eXit Log Menu
Ins Toggle Insert Mode
End Show Last Page
Home Show First Page
PgUp Page Up
PgDn Page Down
Up One Entry
Down One Entry
14.20.1 Alt-A Append Entry
This function key allows you to manually append an entry to the
log. You can also use this command to enter the odd SSB contact into
the logbook file. If you do, use the characters "SSB" or "FM" for
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 67
those voice modes to remain compatible with the rest of the DBASE
logbook package.
When appending or editing an entry, LAN-LINK will automatically
enter the date, time, callsign of the other station, band, mode and
QSL information in upper case.
The comments field in the LAN-LINK logbook file is restricted to a
maximum of 20 characters. If you try and enter more than 20, the
surplus will be ignored.
14.20.2 Alt-E Edit Log Entry
This function key allows you to edit the highlighted entry. Move
the cursor with the arrow keys, and end the edit process by
depressing the "Escape" key.
You may use the "QSL" entry to tag the fact that you have written
out or received a QSL card.
14.20.3 Alt-H Scan Log by Call
This function key allows you to scan the logbook by callsign prefix
for the callsign in the highlighted entry in the logbook. This
command displays the contents of the logbook file in a formatted
manner on the screen. It requests the callsign of the log entry to
be displayed. If you want to see entries for particular callsigns or
parts of a callsign, enter those callsigns or the front parts of the
callsign. Valid entries are G, G3, G3Z etc. If you want to see every
entry in the log, don't use this command, use the Page Up and Page
Down keys from the Main Log menu.
14.20.4 Alt-S Scan Log by Call
This function key allows you to scan the logbook by callsign prefix
for the callsign entered with the Alt-C or Alt-E keys. This command
displays the contents of the logbook file in a formatted manner on
the screen. It requests the callsign of the log entry to be
displayed. If you want to see entries for particular callsigns or
parts of a callsign, enter those callsigns or the front parts of the
callsign. Valid entries are G, G3, G3Z etc. If you want to see every
entry in the log, don't use this command, use the Page Up and Page
Down keys from the Main Log menu.
14.20.5 Alt-U Toggle Delete Mark
This function key allows you to mark an entry for deletion, or
unmark it in case you change your mind. Entries marked for deletion
will be flagged by an "*" character next to the record number.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 68
14.20.6 Alt-X eXit Log
This function key lets you exit from the Logbook.
14.20.7 Ins Toggle Insert Mode
This function key allows you to turn the insert mode ON and OFF for
the edit/append functions.
14.20.8 End Show Last Page
This function key moves you to the last callsign on the last page
of the logbook.
14.20.9 Home Show First Page
This function key moves you to the first callsign on the first page
of the logbook.
14.20.10 PgUp Move Up One Page
This function key moves the display up one page of the logbook.
14.20.11 PgDn Move Down One Page
This function key moves the display down one page of the logbook.
14.20.12 Up Arrow Move Up One Entry
This function key moves the highlight up one entry in the logbook.
14.20.13 Down Arrow Move Down One Entry
This function key moves the highlight down one entry in the
logbook.
14.20.14 Alt-P Change printer line default lines per page
This key allows you to change the default number of lines on a
page when a log is printed. The current default is 55 lines before
the page feed character is transmitted. Previous versions of LAN-
LINK had a default value of 60 (fixed).
14.20.15 Alt-Q QSL current entry
This key allows you to update the QSL information on a log entry.
When you activate the function key, the selected entry will be
edited. See section 14.21 for details of how the LAN-LINK QSL
function works.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 69
14.21 QSL Menu
The QSL menu provides QSL database features. The following options
are available.
C Change QSL State
F Print from QSL File
Q QSL Contacts
LAN-LINK allows you to print QSL labels to be stuck onto postcards,
QSL cards or any type of card. since QSL bureaus want the cards
sorted in alpha-numerical order, LAN-LINK also allows you to copy
the entry from the log book into a QSL file (QSL.DBF) and print it
out in a sorted manner when you are ready to send a batch of cards
to the bureau.
Labels are only printed in the Epson/Standard DOS printer format,
one-up labels.
14.21.1 Change QSL State
The allowable states are : Printer, Disk File, or Nothing [P, D or
N], where:
Printer - prints to a basic printer.
Disk file - appends the entry to another disk file (QSL.DBF)
Nothing - does nothing.
The active state is shown at the base of the QSL menu.
14.21.2 Print from QSL File
The QSL file (database) must be indexed before you print the
labels. to make sure there isn't a problem change to the QSL file
(logbook), and use the re-index option before you print labels. You
will also have to set up the label in the printer before running a
batch. Use the 'printer' state to print one or two labels directly
to set up the printer before running the batch.
14.21.3 QSL Contacts
If the QSL state is "disk", then you will receive the following
prompt:
QSL Exists, Append entries [Y or N] ?
It is to remind you the QSL file already exists. This is in case
you printed a batch of labels and forgot to purge the QSL file.
The next prompt is 'Prefix'. Enter the prefix of the call you wish
to QSL. If you enter 'G3' for example, you will get a display of all
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 70
contacts with stations having the "G3" prefix. If you enter 'G3ZCZ'
for example, you will get a display of all the contacts with
"G3ZCZ". By entering the prefix for a particular country, all
contacts with that country may be seen. Enter the number associated
with the log entry, change the qsl information, then push 'Esc' to
terminate the sequence. The log entry will be updated only when the
sequence for all QSO's for the prefix is changed.
This feature allows you to update your log books based on an
incoming batch of cards from the bureau, without having to sort
them. The labels will always be printed in a sorted manner.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 71
15.0 MESSAGE MENU
The Message Menu is shown in Figure 15. Type the single letter to
make your choice.
Figure 15 The Message Menu
B PBBS Command Files
C Current Messages
L Leave Note
N Print Message
O Old Messages
T Time Tag
V View Messages
15.1 PBBS Command Files
This option shows you a list of the PBBS command files on the
default directory. In other words, all files with the file extension
of ".BBS".
15.2 Current Messages
This option shows you a list of the outgoing messages that have not
been sent. In other words, all files with the file extension of
".OUT".
15.3 View Message
This feature allows you to view messages in the computer. After
depressing the key you will be prompted for INcoming or OUTgoing
(I/O) messages. If you request "I" (Incoming) messages you will see
the messages addressed to your callsign. If you request "O" (for
OUTgoing) you will be presented with a directory window containing a
list of messages. Move the cursor down to the desired message, and
touch the "Enter" key. If you don't want to view any of them, then
move the cursor down to a blank line. If you have more messages than
one screen full, use the Pgdn (Page Down) key to show the next
screen full.
15.4 Leave Note
This feature allows you to leave a note for another station on the
LAN in your system. It works using the editor in the manner
described in Section 8.
15.5 Old Messages
This feature shows you a list of the messages that have been sent.
In other words, all files with the file extension of ".OLD".
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 72
15.6 Time Tag
This option is used to place a date time header on a message file
previously prepared by a word processor. The name of the file must
be in the format "CALLSIGN.OUT" (i.e. G3ZCZ.OUT). It requests the
callsign of the message file. It then opens a new file, writes the
header to the new file and copies the contents of the original
"*.OUT" file to the new one. When all is done, the original filename
is changed to "*.BAK" and the new one becomes "*.OUT".
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 73
16.0 TNC MENU
The TNC Menu depends on the TNC. For example the MFJ1278 provides
the choices are shown in Figure 16-1. The PK-232 TNC menu is similar
as shown in Figure 16-2. The actual menu you see also depends on the
mode. In the non packet modes, the non packet options will be locked
out. For example, in the PK-232 Baudot mode, the menu will appear as
shown in Figure 16-3.
Figure 16-1 MFJ1278 TNC Menu
D Set MFJ1278 Date/Time
E Disable MFJ1278 Port
F Flush MFJ1278 Buffer
I Initialize MFJ1278
M calls Monitored List
S Show Connect Status
T Change cText
X Activate MFJ1278 Mailbox
Y Deactivate MFJ1278 Mailbox
Figure 16-2 The PK-232 TNC Menu
D Set PK232 Date/Time
E Disable PK232 Port
F Flush PK232 Buffer
I Initialize PK232
M calls Monitored List
S Show Connect Status
T Change cText
X Activate PK232 Mailbox
Y Deactivate PK232 Mailbox
Figure 16-3 The PK-232 TNC Menu in BAUDOT
D Set PK232 Date/Time
E Disable PK232 Port
F Flush PK232 Buffer
I Initialize PK232
Whichever menu is displayed, type in the single letter to make your
choice.
16.1 Set TNC Date/Time
This feature puts the TNC into the Command Mode and loads the date
into it from the computer time of day clock. This command does not
work on the TNC1.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 74
16.2 Flush TNC Buffer
This option is used to flush LAN-LINK's incoming or outgoing text
buffer and that of the PK-232. When used with other TNCs it will
only flush contents (if any) of the buffers in the PC. If you flush
the incoming buffer, you will only flush the buffer in the PC. Any
characters still in the TNC buffer will still come through. If that
happens, bring up the function but wait a while before activating
it.
16.3 Initialize TNC
This feature sets up the defaults for the TNC from the file LAN-
LINK.SYS. If you have put batteries in the TNC, you should normally
only have to run this command when you first power up the TNC or
change the batteries. However, the batteries must be removed
initially since they are there to retain the default settings of the
TNC (particularly the PK-232). Once the initialization is complete,
you can replace the batteries but leave the TNC on since the battery
provides power to the RAMs after the TNC power is turned off.
The function will also set the date and time within the TNC from
the PC computer clock, and, when it has loaded the configuration
file, may prompt you to set the TNC Terminal mode. If you are using
a TNC1 or a TNC2, it will not prompt you because it assumes that
they only operate on VHF packet. If you are using a KPC-2, you may
select "H" or "V", and of course, if you have a PK-232, you may
choose any of the options.
16.4 Show Calls Monitored List
This option performs the same operation as Function Key 5.
16.5 Show Connect Status
When you are in the Packet Communications Mode, this command lets
you see the state of the connection. It will show you if there are
any unacknowledged packets en route to the other station. If you
have been sending text, it is advisable to use this command before
you disconnect, to ensure that all the data has been received and
acknowledged by the other party. You may use this command in either
the TNC Command or the TNC Converse Mode.
In a multi-connect situation, it will show you the status on all
the I/O channels.
You may also use this command to reset the status window display
after a relink or any other event which was not reflected in the
status window.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 75
16.6 Change CTEXT
This feature allows you to change the message that will be received
by another packet station when it connects to you. Refer to the
CTEXT command in the TNC manual.
16.7 Activate TNC Mailbox
The mailbox in your TNC provides a convenient way for people to
leave you a message when your PC is switched off or is in use for
something other than packet radio. If you do choose to make use of
the personal PBBS in the mailbox, make sure that you have a battery
in the TNC. You will have to interrogate the mailbox in the command
mode to view any messages. Type the commands listed in your TNC
manual.
This menu option allows you to activate the personal mailbox built
into your TNC to read any messages stored in it, or, before shutting
down, if you have not set the shut down mode to 5.
To save your local full service PBBS SYSOP some hassles, it is
strongly recommended that you let LAN-LINK do your outgoing and
incoming message and bulletin store and forwarding. Use the "L"
option in the Edit menu to enter any messages off-line, the "M" and
"K" options in the Edit menu to answer any incoming messages or
comment on any bulletins. Once the messages are written into the
LOCALPBBS.BBS file, let the PBBS Zap take care of transferring the
messages to the PBBS.
16.8 Deactivate TNC Mailbox
This option allows you to deactivate the personal mailbox built
into your TNC.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 76
17.0 AMSAT-OSCAR MENU
This menu allows you to configure the KAM, MFJ1278, or the PK-232
to copy signals from AMSAT-OSCAR Spacecraft telemetry beacons
depending on the TNC. The following options are available.
D Full Duplex ON/OFF
S SAREX Menu
Type in the single letter to make your choice.
17.1 Full Duplex ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the FULLDUPLEX parameter in the TNC
ON and OFF. Set it to OFF (default) when working a station simplex
(same uplink and downlink frequencies) i.e. MIR. Set FULLDUPLEX to
ON when working a station duplex (different uplink and downlink
frequencies) i.e. SAREX and Fuji-OSCAR 20.
17.2 SAREX MENU
This menu shown in Figure 17-4, is only active in the Packet
Communications Mode. It is designed for use with the Shuttle Amateur
Radio Experiment (SAREX), MIR and the packet radio Microsats, or any
terrestrial station you want to connect with as soon as they appear
on frequency. Apart from the Attack Mode, it can also be used as a
diagnostic LAN tool for monitoring LAN traffic.
Figure 17-4 The SAREX Menu
A Set Attack Mode ON
C Set SAREX Call
D Edit SAREX Capture File
L Turn SAREX Capture ON/OFF
M set Attack Mode Connect/CQ
Z Turn Zap R0MIR-1 ON/OFF
0 Multiple User Connects
17.2.1 Attack Mode ON/OFF
If the Attack Mode is set, this option will cause LAN-LINK to issue
a connect request to the SAREX Call whenever a packet sent to or
from it is heard. The mode, is cleared when the connect is made (and
does not retry out) or when the "A" option is selected a second
time, or when the Alert Call is cleared. If this mode is enabled,
the Alert/SAREX Call prefix shown in the Status Window will indicate
accordingly.
A happy face will be displayed next to the ">" before the call once
the connect has been achieved.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 77
Be careful using this feature, as it has the potential to cause a
great deal of QRM. It can also be cleared by another station
connecting to you and telling you to ":QRT:".
In the SAREX configuration you are listening on one channel while
transmitting on an other. If this feature is used on a simplex
channel (everyone transmits and listens on the same channel) aimed
at a DX-pedition or the MIR space station, there is a potential
lockout mode, in which any one station sending a connect request to
the desired/SAREX call will trigger the other ones on frequency who
will in turn trigger the first. If this pile up situation occurs, I
hope the DX-station will QSY and leave the automatic stations to do
their thing. IN any event, if you use this feature and cause QRM,
anyone can connect to you with the callsign of the DX station (as a
pirate) and shut you down. You will then not get the coveted DX QSL.
17.2.2 Change SAREX Call
This option lets you temporarily change the SAREX call.
17.2.3 SAREX Packets Capture to Disk ON/OFF
This option allows you to configure LAN-LINK to capture to disk any
packets addressed to or from the SAREX callsign. A "[S]" will be
displayed in the status window when this option is active. The
capture to disk file is opened by a packet header containing the
SAREX call, and closed by another packet header not containing the
call. When the file is open, the "[S]" will blink. Packet headers
are considered to be lines with a ">" character in them. LAN-LINK
thus considers both of the lines below as packet headers.
N4QQ*>G3ZCZ
N4QQ PBBS>
If you use this feature for monitoring PBBS traffic, the PBBS
prompt lines ("E.G. N4QQ PBBS>") will not be captured to disk. Do
not get your SYSOP to remove the ">" from the prompt line, or the
ZAP feature will then not work.
A happy face will be displayed in the "[S]" after the SAREX call
has been heard.
If you want to see an ORBITER menu, temporarily change the SAREX
call to be the same as your call and bring up the AMSAT-OSCAR Menu.
17.2.4 Edit SAREX Capture-to-disk File
This option lets you edit the SAREX Capture-to-disk file as long as
it is less than 64 kBytes.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 78
17.2.5 Zap SAREX ON/OFF
This option combines the "Set SAREX Attack Mode" and the "SAREX
Packets Capture to Disk ON/OFF" options in one fast operation.
17.2.6 Set Attack Mode to Connect/CQ
This option allows you to configure the SAREX Attack mode to
digipeat or CQ via the SAREX station as well as to try for connect.
Use the CQ feature to digipeat via MIR, and the connect for the
Space Shuttle. If the Attack Mode is set, LAN-LINK will either try
for a connect or send an unproto packet containing the CQ text. If
you want it to go through the SAREX Callsign you must configure the
UNPROTO parameter in the TNC. For example, to attempt a digipeat via
R2MIR, set 'UNPROTO CQ via R2MIR' from the command mode.
17.3 SAREX Orbiter Features
This was the menu as seen by WA4SIR in orbit on STS-35. You need
the SAREX ROBOT EPROM for this menu to actually do anything to the
TNC. The EPROM may be available from The Radio Amateur Satellite
Corporation (AMSAT) for DX-pedition use. Other options which control
LAN-LINK parameters may be used without the SAREX ROBOT EPROM.
In the Orbiter mode, LAN-LINK does not scan incoming text for the
"*** CONNECTED"
and
"*** DISCONNECTED"
messages when the SAREX Robot is active. This inhibits the bells
and the capture-to-disk. It also means that the Robot must be OFF
for any :Q: code uploads or downloads to occur.
17.3.1 Status Window Display
A flashing ">>" appears in the status window when the SAREX robot
is active. The SAREX Configuration boots up assuming that the SAREX
Robot is active (Default).
17.3.2 Alt-O Function key
The Alt-O Function Key brings up the Orbiter menu. This is a faster
route than the "Esc O" sequence.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 79
17.3.3 The Metabeacon
The Metabeacon is loaded from the contents of one of the META.00n
files. These files may be created by the LAN-LINK editor. When
loading, LAN-LINK will insert a pass character (^V) into the text
before a carriage return, so as not to end the packet before at
least 240 characters, and not more than 255 characters have been
output to the TNC. The maximum number of characters that can be
loaded into the Metabeacon is 1776. The maximum number of packets in
a Metabeacon is 7. You can also force a hard carriage return or "end
of packet" in the Metabeacon by inserting the "\" (backslash)
character, which will not be transmitted, into the text.
17.3.4 SAREX Orbiter Menu
The following commands are active in the Orbiter Menu.
17.3.4.1 Activates Beacons/SAREX Robot: This option activates the
SAREX Robot and loads the Meta Beacon. This command is designed for
use when the SAREX is returned to the regular frequency.
17.3.4.2 Set QRZ/QSL Beacon Interval: This command allows you to
change the beacon timer.
17.3.4.3 Set SAREX Call: This command allows you to change the SAREX
call. Don't use this command on orbit (it's for ground use only).
17.3.4.4 Turn SAREX ROBOT OFF: The Robot must be turned ON and OFF
this way to synchronize LAN-LINK to the TNC. When the Robot is
turned OFF the following commands are sent to the TNC by LAN-LINK.
USERS 1
|A
RO OFF
CMSG OFF
NO OFF
17.3.4.5 Set SAREX ROBOT Heard Count: This command lets you set the
Heard Count number.
17.3.4.6 Show I/O Status: Shows the callsign of the station connect-
ed on each stream, the SAREX Robot state, the number of USERS, the
beacon timer value, the metabeacon timer value and the CTEXT.
17.3.4.7 ChecK Count: Shows both heard and worked counts.
17.3.4.8 List Heard Calls: Lists the callsigns of the last few
stations heard.
17.3.4.9 Load Metabeacon: This command loads the Metabeacon. You
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 80
will be prompted for a text file number in the META.00n series.
Enter a number 1-9 corresponding to META.001-META.009. The 0 value
is for file META.010. Note the delays after loading the file to
allow the TNC to stabilize.
17.3.4.10 Show Worked Calls: Shows the last 35 or so callsigns
worked.
17.3.4.11 Turn SAREX ROBOT ON: The SAREX Robot must be turned ON and
OFF via the menu. When the Robot is turned ON the following commands
are sent to the TNC by LAN-LINK.
USERS 9
CONOK ON
CMSG ON
RO ON
NO ON
17.3.4.12 Stop Metabeacon: This command stops the metabeacon
transmission. When activated, the contents of the beacon are dumped
to the UNPROTO address (default SAREX) by the TNC, rather like a
regular PBBS dumping packets when a user disconnects abnormally.
17.3.4.13 Set Metabeacon Interval: This command allows you to set
the metabeacon timer. It will be loaded into the TNC the next time
that the metabeacon is loaded. Even though loaded into the TNC
immediately, it does not take effect till then.
17.3.4.14 Set SAREX ROBOT Worked Count: Lets you set the starting
number.
17.3.4.15 Set Connect TeXt: This is the text (CTEXT) that will be
transmitted to an incoming station when the ROBOT mode is off. This
option lets you set up a new text string to go with the QSO number.
17.3.4.16 Selects Silent Mode: This command turns off the beacons,
the SAREX Robot and also stops the metabeacon. This command is
designed to be used just before any prearranged packet activity.
17.3.4.17 Restart TNC: This command RESTARTs the TNC, loads the date
from the computer's clock and turns the "EC OFF". It seems to have
no effect on the SAREX ROBOT and counters, but does kill the
metabeacon.
17.3.4.18 Capture QSL/QRZ Calls: This command initiates the log-to-
disk operation. It turns the capture-to-disk "on" and sends the
following commands to the TNC:- "DA", "SERW", "SERH","MW", "MH".
When the calls have stopped scrolling, use Function key 1 to turn
the capture-to-disk off.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 81
18.0 PARAMETER MENU
A typical Parameter Menu is shown in Figure 18. The colors used for
the option letter differentiate between those options that are
"remembered" in the SYS file and those that are only set temporarily
for the session. Type in the single letter to make your choice.
Figure 18 A Typical Parameter Menu
A Send LAN-LINK.OUT is ON 0 Change Band & Power
B Beacon/Robot Mode is OFF 1 Change PBBS Parameters
C Clear Connect Count 2 Change Callsigns
D Digipeat Detect is OFF 3 Change Directories
E Command Echo is ON 4 Enter Common Calls
F PBBS Zap Drop Link is ON 5 Change File Names
I Packet Beacon Control is ON 6 Change LAN-LINK Parameters
L Automatic Ctdsk is ON 7 Change PC Communications Parameters
M Set Message Count 8 Change Colors
N NODE Drop Link is OFF 9 Change SAREX Parameters
P Printer is OFF
Q QTC Snatch is ON U Update LAN-LINK.SYS
R :QSP: Relay Flag is ON V Verify Changes
S Sound is ON W Change Scan Words
T Contest Mode is OFF Z Time Id. is OFF
X DCD Flag is ON ! Zap PBBS On Next Beacon is OFF
Y PBBS Snatch is ON + Misc. Flag is OFF
18.1 Turn Beacon Mode ON/OFF
This command toggles the beacon option for the automatic CQ caller
in the AMTOR and Packet Communications Modes. When it is active a
"[B]" will be displayed in the status window. In this mode, the
Automatic CQ sequence will resume after the AMTOR link is dropped or
a Packet Communications Mode disconnect.
In the Beacon Mode, the last few logbook entries will be displayed
in the logpage window which overlays the outgoing text window at the
bottom of the screen.
In the Packet Mode, the CTEXT message is the only transmission from
you that the other station will receive, so make it good and don't
forget to set "CMSG ON".
In the AMTOR Mailbox/Beacon Mode, the contents of the LAN-LINK.TXT
file will be transmitted to the station who called you. The capture-
to-disk will then be turned on to record one transmission from that
station. The QSO will then be logged to the logbook file. Don't
forget to check the entries in the logbook and text in the LAN-
LINK.RUN files in case the computer made a mistake in recognizing
the call sign of the other station.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 82
The Beacon mode is designed to encourage people to QSY off the
crowded HF packet channels. Do not use it on a crowded HF channel or
on an active VHF channel. If you do, you will soon find that other
stations have set their TNCs to ignore your packets, and you will
not work anyone. You will just be a source of QRM and will be known
as such.
The Beacon mode is also designed for robot beacons on the higher
frequencies. For example, if you leave it running on 6 or 10 meters,
you never know when a short opening will allow a QSO with some part
of the world, a DX contact you would otherwise have missed. Don't
leave it running on 20 Meters when the band is wide open. Further
applications are in meteor scatter and other "exotic" communication
modes.
If you are using the Beacon Mode in a special event station or DX-
pedition you may type characters into the transmit buffer, while the
other station is sending to you. When he, she, or even it, turns it
back to you, you will transmit those characters before the sign-off
sequence.
In both the Packet and AMTOR communications modes, the robot may be
shut down by stations connecting to you and telling you to QRT.
18.2 Clear Connect Counter
You use this option to reset the PACKET and AMTOR Beacon Mode
"connect has taken place indicator" and QTC Snatch counters. These
are the flashing "[C]" and "[Q]" displays in the status window.
Whenever someone else connects or links up to you the "[C]" display
will be incremented. The number shown with the "C" is the number of
connects that have taken place since the Indicator was last reset.
If a "happy face" is flashing along with the connect count, your
"target station" was amongst those connecting. The "[Q]" indicator
alerts you to the fact that LAN-LINK tried to connect to another
station after recognizing your call in a mail beacon. Both are reset
by this option. If you are monitoring Packet traffic on a channel,
you may not notice that a connect has previously taken place. These
indicators alert you to check the contents of the Incoming mail file
("yourcall.OUT") for any incoming messages.
If the "Q" count is much greater than the "C" count, you may be
copying a beacon from a station that you cannot connect with
directly.
18.3 TNC Custom Line
This line has different effects depending on which TNC you are
using. To set the line, add the numbers up for the parameters you
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 83
want, and put the number in line 32.
18.3.1 All TNCs
18.3.1.1 TNC Sync Shift (128): LAN-LINK normally ensures that the hf
SSB/CW Transmitter and Receiver data sense are in phase (i.e. both
set to same sideband). This presupposes AFSK operation. If you are
running FSK and need them out of phase, set this byte to 128. If
this line includes the number 128, LAN-LINK will NOT set the
receiver shift when you change modes.
18.3.1.2 Zap Stay Up (64) If you include the number 64 in this line,
LAN-LINK will default to staying connected to a PBBS when the Zap
sequence ends. Use this parameter setting if the messages contain a
lot of ">" characters at the end of lines and LAN-LINK is faked into
thinking the messages ended prematurely. You may change this
parameter via the 'F' option in the Parameter Menu.
18.3.1.3 TNC Initialize Date (32) LAN-LINK normally sets the time of
day clock in the TNC from the PC during initialization. If you don't
want LAN-LINK to set the TNC time of day clock, include the value 32
in this line.
18.3.2 PK-232, PK-900, PK-88 and DSP-2232
18.3.2.1 PK-232 Digipeat Display Flag (1) Set this line to 1 to
activate this feature, 0 to inhibit it. If the Digipeat Display is
active, any signals digipeated through you will be stored to the
LAN-LINK.RUN file and a "beep" will be sounded for each packet being
digipeated. The status window will also contain a "[D]".
18.3.2.2 PK-232 Converse Mode Default (2) LAN-LINK runs the PK 232
is command mode in the RTTY an CW modes. Function key (FK) 7 allows
you to set the PK 232 into the converse mode. The MFJ 1278 and KAM
operate in the Converse mode in all communications modes. If you set
this bit to 2, LAN-LINK will run the PK-232 in the converse mode in
all modes, and you will not need to use FK 7 to enter the converse
mode before transmitting.
18.3.2.3 PK-232 Serial Port Initialization (4) If this bit is set to
4, LAN-LINK will assume there are no batteries in the PK-232 and
issue the '* * *' sequence to the PK-232 on start up. If this bit is
not set, LAN-LINK will assume the PK-232 contains batteries and will
not try to synchronize the PC to PK-232 serial port.
This feature was removed from LAN-LINK in 2.00 in response to
numerous users who had batteries in their PK-232's and didn't want
to see the initialization sequence. Then came the complaints from
the users who didn't have batteries in their PK-232's.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 84
18.3.2.4 PK-232 XMITOK Flag (8) In the CW communications mode, you
may have to change the value of the PK-232 XMITOK Parameter
depending on how you connect the PK-232 to your transmitter. This
LAN-LINK parameter determines if LAN-LINK instructs the PK-232 to
turn the XMITOK PK-232 parameter on and off when entering and
leaving the CW communications Mode. You may temporarily change the
value of the XMITOK Flag in the CW menu to set things up.
As an example, to configure LAN-LINK to initialize the PK-232
serial port (4) and default to the Converse Mode (2), Set this
parameter to 4+2 or 6.
18.3.3 KAM
18.3.3.1 KAM Set LFADD (2) If this bit is set, LAN-LINK will send a
'LFADD ON' command to the KAM when you enter the BAUDOT
communications mode, and send a 'LFADD OFF' command when you exit
that mode to another one.
18.3.3.2 KAM Pre 3.0 EPROM (4) If your KAM contains an EPROM with a
Revision number of less than 3.0, then set this bit. LAN-LINK will
issue NODE commands when selecting SOLO mode. You must set this bit
if you plan to use the mailbox in the KAM, or the traffic on
frequency will fill the memory in the KAM, and people will not be
able to leave you any messages.
18.3.4 MFJ 1278
Each time MFJ release an update to the MFJ1278 something seems to
change. The setting of these parameters depends on which EPROM
version you own.
18.3.4.1 MFJ Radio Port (1) This bit allows MFJ users to set the
default radio port for VHF. Set this bit to 1 to assign Radio 1 to
VHF (Radio 2 to HF). Set this bit to 0 to assign Radio 2 to VHF
(Radio 1 to HF).
18.3.4.2 MFJ Echo ON/OFF Flag (2) Some versions of the MFJ firmware
require 'ECHO ON' in AMTOR. IF bit 2 is set, LAN-LINK will command
'ECHO ON' before entering AMTOR, and will command 'ECHO OFF' when
leaving AMTOR, if you switch modes via the Menu.
18.3.4.3 MFJ AMTOR Robot Converse Flag (4) It seemed to me that the
MFJ1278 went into the Converse mode automatically on an incoming
AMTOR link, while the MFJ1278B did not. Set this parameter if you
use the AMTOR Robot.
18.4 Turn LAN-LINK Beacon Control ON/OFF
This option toggles the LAN-LINK Handshake features. When they are
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 85
on (default), the Connect handshake message
[ZCZ] *** LAN-LINK 2.32>
will be transmitted on incoming connects. The beacon text and time
will be controlled by LAN-LINK as a function of the messages you
have posted on your system. When they are off, LAN-LINK does not do
anything to your beacon, nor does it transmit the handshake.
18.5 Turn Command Echo ON/OFF
This option toggles the LAN-LINK "Command ECHO flag" ON and OFF
(not the ECHO parameter in the TNC). If the Command Echo flag is
set, the commands and (contents of) files LAN-LINK sends to the TNC
will be displayed in the outgoing window. Set this flag to see how
LAN-LINK commands the TNC in the different modes.
18.6 Change Keyboard Beep Count
LAN-LINK counts the number of characters entered on a line at the
keyboard. When it gets to a preset value it will beep, signaling you
to start a new line. If you have the Word wrap option set, it will
also automatically insert a "carriage return/line feed" character
sequence into the outgoing text for you. This option changes the
value that the keyboard beep counter is compared with to sound the
audio signal.
18.7 Set Message Count
As an alternative to Function Key 8 (F8) or Alt-D, using this
option will also load a QTC "Mail" list into your Packet Communi-
cations Mode Beacon and initiate a LAN-LINK beacon transmission
every 30 minutes (Refer to the BTEXT command in the TNC manual). If
no messages are present, or the only message is to you (incoming or
snatched), beacon transmissions are inhibited. This conforms to good
operating practice on crowded Packet channels.
18.8 Turn Node Drop Link ON/OFF
When connecting via a Node, the normal way of operating is to
disconnect if the connect attempt fails. You may configure the Node
connect attempt flag to stay connected at the node where the failure
occurred. Use the normal mode when trying to get through on a known
path, and the stay alive mode when exploring Node circuits.
18.9 Turn Printer ON/OFF
This option toggles the printer ON and OFF. When the printer is
turned on, any incoming data will be printed in real time. If you
intend to print files received at 1200 baud in the Packet Communi-
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 86
cations Mode, use a print spooler or you may lose data. The printer
is automatically turned off in the Packet Mode when a disconnect
occurs.
18.10 Turn QTC Snatch ON/OFF
This option toggles the QTC Snatch flag ON and OFF. If the QTC
Snatch flag is enabled, LAN-LINK scans the contents of packets
appearing in the Inwindow on the screen while the terminal is
disconnected. Should it recognize the three text strings "LAN-LINK",
":QTC:", and "YOURCALLSIGN" in the contents of a packet, it will
then issue a connect request to the callsign of the LAN-LINK station
that originated the beacon transmission. If the connect is made, the
other station will send you the message automatically which LAN-LINK
will "capture to disk". The connect will time out and terminate a
few minutes later.
The normal connect request will be made DIRECT to the station. If
you expect messages from stations you can only connect with via a
digipeater, place the path in your LAN-LINK.DIR directory file. It
should be there anyhow if you connect to the station regularly. For
example, if you expect messages from 4Z4ZB whom you can only work if
digipeated via 4X1AA then place an entry like "4Z4ZB 4Z4ZB V 4X1AA"
in the LAN-LINK.DIR file.
The QTC Snatch leaves your messages in a message file YOURCALL.OUT.
It is triggered by the first ">" in the initial connect response of
"LAN-LINK 2.32R>" and terminated by the "over" at the end of the
message e.g. G3ZCZ/W8>. If you train stations not using LAN-LINK who
want to leave you messages to trigger your QTC-Snatch, by
transmitting the following un-addressed packet
LAN-LINK :QTC: YOURCALL
your system will connect to them. (For example to leave a message
for me, they would send
LAN-LINK :QTC: G3ZCZ
as an un-addressed packet [in Converse Mode when not connected, or
in their beacon text].)
If they then send you a ">" on a line by itself, followed by the
message itself, and terminated by another ">" as the last character
of the line, the message will end up in a message file rather than
in the LAN-LINK.RUN file and you can scan it fast using Alt-M
(Message Scan Menu Options). It goes without saying that the message
itself should not contain the ">" character at the end of a line. If
it does, by the way, the first part of the message will be in the
message file, the remainder will be in the LAN-LINK.RUN file.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 87
18.11 Turn :QSP: Relay Flag ON/OFF
This option toggles the Store and forward Message Relay Capability
of your system ON and OFF. If the Message Relay Capability is active
(toggled on), any one who connects can store a message in your
system using the ":QSP: CALLSIGN" NC/L command. If the Message Relay
Capability is not active anyone who attempts to ":QSP:" a message
will receive a ":QNO: error" message. The status display window will
show a "[R]" when the Message Relay Capability is active. The
default state for the Message Relay Capability is loaded from the
LAN-LINK.SYS file.
When the Store and forward capability is active, the suffix "R"
will be added to the "[ZCZ] *** LAN-LINK 2.32". i.e, "[ZCZ] *** LAN-
LINK 2.32R" message received by anyone connecting to your system to
notify them that they can store messages. In this manner they don't
have to try to leave a message and then get ":QNO:" error message to
find out that the feature is toggled off.
Remember, if you configure your computer to store and forward
messages, you have a moral obligation to deliver them.
18.12 Turn Sound ON/OFF
This option toggles the sound ON and OFF. If the sound is off, a
flashing indicator will be displayed in the Status Window. When the
sound is toggled on again, a chime will sound to verify the audio.
18.13 Turn Contest Mode ON/OFF
This option first toggles the Contest Mode. If the Contest Mode is
active, the word "TEST" and the number of the next QSO will be
displayed in the status window. When the Contest Mode is toggled on,
this command prompts you to set the starting QSO number, and the
standard message that will be transmitted as part of the exchange of
messages during the contest. The QSO number will be incremented each
time you log a contact.
The contest feature is toggled off the next time you select this
feature.
While these features do give you some semiautomatic contest
operation by using command keys, there is no checking of callsigns
for duplicates built into the program. You may do that by using the
Alt-S hot key.
In a contest, you enter the callsigns and call the other station in
the normal manner, then use the "End" Key to transmit the exchange
(QSO number and standard text). LAN-LINK will only transmit the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 88
contest text in this manner. If you want to add a "K" or "KN", you
will need to put it in the contest text string. It is also advisable
to use a different log file for each contest to cut down the search
time. The contest QSO number increments each time you log the QSO
(Alt-L).
You may put the Contest Mode into automatic if you are operating
AMTOR or packet. To do so, use the Alt-O function key.
The following special character sequences can be entered in the
contest text string and are converted dynamically at time of
transmission.
18.13.1 ##:A "##" will be replaced by the QSO number when the text
is transmitted.
18.13.2 #1: A "#1" will be replaced by the callsign of the station
being worked in the contest text string.
18.13.3 #N: A "#N" will be replaced by the name of the TNC. Use this
if you have more than one TNC and want to use the same bragtape for
both of them.
18.13.4 #T: A "#T" will be replaced by the date and time as read
from the PC time-of-day clock and converted to Universal Coordinated
Time (UTC). A sample time text is "03-Mar-92 03:13".
For example, use the following entries for the following contests;
"##1 UR ##A" ... in the Sweepstakes,
"5905" ... in the WAZ,
"59 MD" ... in the ARRL DX, and
"59 ##" ... in the WPX.
As an example, if I (W3/G3ZCZ) am in the Sweepstakes contest, and
my Contest text line is,
"##1 UR ##A W3/G3ZCZ 68 MDC".
If the next QSO number is 345, and I am working KW3C, when I touch
the "End" key, LANLINK would transmit the following line
"KW3C UR 345A W3/G3ZCZ 68 MDC".
18.14 Turn DCD Flag ON/OFF
If you are using a PK-232 then this flag should be set to ON. If
you are using a KAM, this flag should be set to OFF. If you are
using another TNC, and if you can set the TNC so that pin 8 on the
RS-232 interface changes state when connected, do so, and set this
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 89
flag to ON. If you can't, then set this flag to OFF. If this flag is
OFF, the multiple-connect modes will not work so don't attempt to
invoke them. If this flag is OFF, the words "*** CONNECTED" and "***
DISCONNECTED" when seen in the LAN may cause spurious apparent
connects and disconnects in LAN-LINK.
18.15 Turn PBBS Snatch ON/OFF
When the PBBS Mail Snatch is enabled, and a PBBS sends a packet
announcing "Mail", if your callsign is in the first line of that
message, LAN-LINK will issue a connect request (again via the path
in LAN-LINK.DIR) to that PBBS. When connected, it will act as if you
have initiated a Zap PBBS command. The Zap counter will be
incremented each time a PBBS Mail Snatch takes place.
If your version of LAN-LINK is less than 2.20 and if the PBBS Mail
beacon has an extra line in it (between the header and the list of
calls) as follows, the PBBS Mail snatch will not work.
If N4FG is monitoring the LAN, and a message is posted for any
callsign containing the character string "N4FG" such as N4FGA, N4FG
will respond to the message. This gives rise to a lock out
situation, because N4FG will respond to the beacon, go through the
sequence described in the Zap PBBS section and disconnect. The
beacon message will not be cleared because it was not read, so the
next mail beacon from the PBBS will contain the call N4FGA, and N4FG
will once again respond to it.
Should you be unlucky and happen to be in this situation, disable
the PBBS Snatch flag and set a Periodic Event to Zap your PBBS
sometime in the middle of the night. Alternatively, when you come
into the shack and the PBBS is in use, set the "Zap PBBS on Next
Mail Beacon" parameter to ON.
18.16 Turn Time Id. ON/OFF
This option allows you to determine if the callsign sequence
transmitted using Function key 3 (F3) will contain a date/time
stamp. If the Id. is set ON a date/time stamp will be transmitted.
18.17 Turn Automatic Capture-to-Disk Flag ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn the automatic "capture-to-disk"
feature ON and OFF.
18.18 Change PBBS Parameters
This sub-menu allows you to change the PBBS Parameters, as
described in the following paragraphs.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 90
18.18.1 Local PBBS Callsign
This option lets you change the call of the local PBBS. This is the
call that LAN-LINK will show in the prompt for the "Zap" command.
18.18.2 Mail-Snatch Trigger Word
You can set the Mail-Snatch Trigger in the PBBS Mail beacon. Most
PBBS's use word "Mail" and a string of calls to indicate the
presence of messages. If your PBBS uses something else, you may
customize LAN-LINK on this line to tell it what word your PBBS uses.
This word is case sensitive. If your PBBS uses "QTC" instead of
"Mail", you may end up calling yourself if you disconnect while
traffic is flowing on the LAN.
18.18.3 Read Request Command
This is the command LAN-LINK issues to the PBBS during a Zap
sequence to request your mail. The default value is "RM" for Read
Mine. On a WA7MBL type PBBS you may change it to "VM" for a Verbose
Read of the full packet headers. On a W0RLI PBBS you may change it
to RN to only request new messages. If you do change it, use the "V"
option in the Parameters Menu to make sure it is correct. If it
isn't correct, the Zap PBBS feature will not work.
18.18.4 Read Bulletin Request Command
This is the command LAN-LINK issues to the PBBS during a Zap
sequence to read bulletins identified by the scan words. The default
value is "R" for Read. For a Verbose Read of the full packet headers
on a WA7MBL type PBBS, change it to "V"; on a W0RLI type PBBS change
it to "RH".
18.18.5 PBBS Subject String
When you enter a message into a PBBS, you first use the "S"
command. The PBBS then sends you a reply asking you for some
information about the PBBS; typically the subject of the message.
When you have entered the subject, the PBBS then asks you for the
rest of the message. This line is used in the Zap sequence and is a
unique word seen in the text that the PBBS sends you asking for the
subject.
18.18.6 PBBS Message String
When you enter a message into a PBBS, you first use the "S"
command. The PBBS then sends you a reply asking you for some
information about the PBBS; typically the subject of the message.
When you have entered the subject, the PBBS then asks you for the
rest of the message. This line is used in the Zap sequence and is a
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 91
unique word seen in the text that the PBBS sends you asking for the
text of the message.
18.19 Change Callsigns
This sub-menu allows you to change the Callsign and AMTOR SELCAL,
as described in the following paragraphs.
18.19.1 Callsign
The default callsign is G8BTB. Please do not use G8BTB. Replace
G8BTB with yours. This is the callsign that will be used in the non
packet modes. You may use "portable designators" such as G3ZCZ/A,
G3ZCZ/W3, W3/G3ZCZ or G3ZCZ/4X, which you cannot do in Packet.
This is the call that will be monitored for in the Digipeat
Monitoring Mode. In this Mode, which is toggled on and off by the
selection of the "D" Option included in the Parameter Menu (PK-232
only), if someone uses you as a digipeater while you are not
connected to anyone else, the event will be logged to disk. This
Mode will only work if your callsign as stored in this line is a
valid (uppercase only) packet callsign.
For example, in the PK-232, if the callsign is G3ZCZ then the
sequence >G3ZCZ> will be recognized as a digipeat and the event
logged. Thus 4X6AA*>G3ZCZ>4Z4ZB would be logged as a digipeat event.
Store your callsign using UPPERCASE characters if you want the
"DIGIPEAT DETECT" option to work (i.e. G3ZCZ). If you use lower case
(i.e. g3zcz), recognition will never take place. The TNC displays
all callsigns in upper case in the non packet communications modes.
If you are using an SSID (e.g. G3ZCZ-8) in the Packet
Communications Mode, you should enter the whole call INCLUDING the
SSID.
18.19.2 The SELCAL
This is your AMTOR SELCAL. LAN-LINK will try to guess it and prompt
you with a SELCAL configured for your callsign. If you want a
different one, overwrite the prompted version.
If you are not using a PK-232 or KAM or the MFJ1278, you don't have
to change anything, but the SELCAL line must still be in the
Configuration file.
18.19.3 The PacketCluster Call
This option allows you to change the default PacketCluster Call
without connecting to it.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 92
18.20 Change Directories
This sub-menu allows you to change the Directories used by LAN-
LINK, as described in the following paragraph.
18.20.1 Capture-to-disk Files Directory
This is the drive and directory that LAN-LINK will put the *.RUN
capture-to-disk files. Note: the last "\" MUST be present if you are
using a different sub-directory.
18.20.2 QBM Download Directory
This is the directory the :QBM: command will search to find a file
to be downloaded. The default directory for the files is \LAN-
LINK\FILES\. Note: the last "\" MUST be present.
18.21 Enter Common Calls
Each time you call another station, LAN-LINK remembers it (up to
the last 16). When you update the SYS file, those calls will be
saved to disk. You can use this option to add calls, delete calls or
edit calls in the list. Use the "Delete" key to delete a call.
18.22 Change File Names
This sub-menu allows you to change the default file names used by
LAN-LINK, as described in the following paragraphs.
18.22.1 VHF Logbook File (VHF.DBF)
This is the name of the file to be used as your VHF Packet logbook.
18.22.2 HF Logbook File (HF.DBF)
This is the name of the file to be used as your HF logbook. It is
used for all HF modes, including HF packet.
18.22.3 Path Directory File (LAN-LINK.DIR)
This is the name of the file used as your call directory.
18.22.4 Brag Tape (LAN-LINK.TXT)
This is the name of the file used as your brag tape.
18.22.5 QBU Upload File Name (QBU-TX.BAT)
This is the name of the batch file used to initiate a QBU.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 93
18.22.6 QBU Download File Name (QBU-RX.BAT)
This is the name of the batch file used when a :QBU: command is
received from a remote station.
18.23 Change LAN-LINK Parameters
This sub-menu allows you to change the LAN-LINK Parameters, as
described in the following paragraphs.
18.23.1 Change CQ Text
This feature allows you to change the contents of the CQ text
message string. This is the message string that is transmitted along
with the CQ call. Think of this message as a CQTEXT line.
18.23.2 Set CQ Delay Time (Seconds)
This option allows you to change the time (seconds) that the LAN-
LINK waits for a response after a CQ call until the following one is
transmitted. The default value (in minutes and seconds) is loaded
from the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
18.23.3 Set CQ Delay Time (Minutes)
This option allows you to change the time (minutes) that the LAN-
LINK waits for a response after a CQ call until the following one is
transmitted. The default value (in minutes and seconds) is loaded
from the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
18.23.4 Set Connect Time Timeout (Minutes)
This option allows you to change the time (minutes) that the LAN-
LINK waits for a response in a packet connect before issuing a
Disconnect command. The default value is loaded from the LAN-
LINK.SYS file.
18.23.5 Set Number of Lines in a Non-Contest CQ Call
This option allows you to change the number of lines in a non-
contest CQ call from the default value of 3 to any number you wish.
The default value is loaded from the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
18.23.6 Keyboard Beep Character Count
When your typing at the keyboard gets to a point where you may
overrun the normal line length, LAN-LINK issues a beep to remind you
to touch the "Enter" key. This option allows you to change the
number of characters you can type in a line before the beep sounds.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 94
Note the beep will not sound if the sound flag is inhibited.
18.23.7 Word Wrap Mode
This option allows you to change the word wrap mode. It is really
more of a "force carriage return" parameter, rather than "word
wrap". There are four options as follows:
18.23.7.1 Off: Word wrap is off.
18.23.7.2 AutoCR: LAN-LINK will insert an "Enter" character for you
into the outgoing text when you enter the first space character
after the beep has sounded.
18.23.7.3 Word: LAN-LINK will hold all entered text until you either
type a space character or touch the "Enter" key. At that time LAN-
LINK will send the word to the TNC.
18.23.7.4 Line: LAN-LINK will hold all entered text until you either
touch the "Enter" key or the beep sounds. At that time LAN-LINK will
send the word to the TNC. Set this parameter value as follows,
0 = OFF,
1 = AutoCR,
2 = Word,
3 = Line.
18.23.8 Set Shut Down Mode (QRT Flag)
This option allows you to customize the shut down and start up
sequences of the TNC as described in the following sections. If the
Shut down mode is not set to 1, you also have the option to
customize the packet terminal mode.
18.23.8.1 State 0: On shut down, turns the TNC into a VHF Digipeater
and turns CONOK OFF (CFROM NONE for the PK-232). In this condition
the TNC will reject connect requests. On start up turns CONOK or
CFROM on.
18.23.8.2 State 1: Does not send any commands to the TNC on shut
down or start up.
18.23.8.3 State 2: On shut down, sends CMSG ON to the TNC. On start
up, sends CMSG OFF to the TNC.
18.23.8.4 State 3: On shut down, turns on the mailbox in the TNC. On
start up, turns off the mailbox.
18.23.8.5 State 4: On shut down, turns on the mailbox in the TNC and
puts the TNC into the SOLO Mode so that the internal buffer in the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 95
TNC does not fill with on-the-air traffic. On start up, turns off
the mailbox.
18.23.8.5 State 5: Does not send any commands to the TNC on shut
down or start up. This option allows you to leave the TNC in a non
packet communications mode. Since LAN-LINK runs open loop, you will
need to manually synchronize LAN-LINK to the TNC next time you power
up the TNC.
18.23.9 Set Default Users
This option allows you to set the maximum number of multiple users
that can be connected to your TNC at the same time, and to configure
the default start up mode of the program. If this parameter is set
to 1, LAN-LINK will configure itself to the single user mode, and
set the maximum number of users to 9. If this parameter is set to
any number other that 1, LAN-LINK will assume that value to be the
maximum number of allowed connects, and configure itself in the
Multiple user Mode (equivalent to the TNC Menu Option 0).
18.23.10 Set UTC Offset
This parameter contains the difference in hours between Universal
Coordinated Time (UTC) and your local time. For example, if you are
located on the east coast of the U.S.A., and it is winter, you are
in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) Zone, which is 5 hours behind
UTC. In this case, the value of the UTC Offset parameter is 5. Don't
forget to change this parameter when the clocks are adjusted each
spring and autumn.
18.23.11 VHF Packet Length
This option allows you to change the default VHF packet length. The
TNC has a maximum permissible value of 255. Set the parameter to 127
or 255.
18.23.12 HF Packet Length
This option allows you to change the default HF packet length. The
default value of about 30 seems to be optimal.
18.23.13 Beacon Time
This option allows you to change the default beacon time. The KAM
requires a value in minutes, all other TNCs in tens of seconds. Use
good operating practice and don't beacon too often. Every 30 minutes
on a well used channel is more than enough.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 96
18.23.14 Custom Prompt before "Over"
This option allows you to add a word or two (up to 20 characters)
before the ">" in packet or the "+?" in AMTOR. If you are working an
AMTOR APLINK PBBS, clear this feature by changing it to a space
character.
18.23.15 Packet Cluster DX Alert Mode
This parameter determines the action LAN-LINK takes when you are
connected to a PacketCluster, and a DX Alert message shows up. The
states are 0, 1, 2, or 3.
If it is 0, LAN-LINK takes no action at all. In all other states,
LAN-LINK splits the prefix from the DX callsign, searches the HF
logbook for the prefix and posts a message in the status window (in
the Alert Call color) as follows: Prefix, Logbook Status, DX
callsign. The logbook status shows up as 'Q' for QSL'd, 'W' for
worked and '?' for not in log. You can configure LAN-LINK to
generate an audible alarm for each condition to save you monitoring
the screen. If the Sound is inhibited, the audible alarm will also
be inhibited. The visual display and audio alarms are controlled by
this parameter as shown in Table 18.23.5.
Table 18.23.5 PacketCluster Logbook Search Parameters
State QSL'd (Q) Worked (W) Not in Log (?)
0 No Action No Action No Action
1 Audio+Display Audio+Display Audio+Display
2 Display Audio+Display Audio+Display
3 Display Display Audio+Display
You can customize the CW tone and speed, by changing the states of
the "Packet Cluster DX Alert Tone CW Dit time" and "Packet Cluster
DX Alert Tone CW Note" parameters in the LAN-LINK.SYS File.
In this version of LAN-LINK, the prefix scan is simple minded, so
set this parameter to 3 to get used to it, then set it to 1.
18.24 Change PC Communications Parameters
This sub-menu allows you to change the Communications Parameters
between the PC and the TNC, as described in the following
paragraphs.
18.24.1 The Communications Port
This is the default Communications port. The default value is 1.
You may set it at any value between 1 and 4. If you only have one
serial port in your PC, set the parameter to "1" even if your card
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 97
is configured as Com2. LAN-LINK will ALWAYS assume Com1 for a single
card. If you use a different port instead of Com1, and plan to do
binary transfers, don't forget to customize the QZ*.BAT files.
The default Com3 and Com4 default PC port values are as follows.
Port Address (Hex) Address (decimal) IRQ
Com 3 3E8 1000 4
Com 4 2E8 744 3
If you set the port number to 0, LAN-LINK will not accept or
transmit any character to the serial port. All other features will
work.
18.24.2 The Terminal Baud Rate
This Parameter tells LAN-LINK what baud rate the TNC is set to.
This is the baud rate on the RS-232 line between the TNC and the PC.
Valid baud rates for LAN-LINK are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and
19,200. If you specify something else LAN-LINK will default to 1200.
You may experience problems when using baud rates greater than
1200. It depends on the CPU clock rate, any TSR's in the PC, and the
I/O card in the PC. LAN-LINK scans the incoming text constantly,
something which requires time. My PK-232, when used with my XT Clone
at 10MHz, does not like baud rates faster than 2400, and sometimes
not even that. The PK-232 seems to drop the first character of some
lines at 4800 baud. Use 1200 until you have tested, and are sure
that a faster one will work.
This program has been tested on a TNC2 and an MFJ1278 using a
terminal baud rate of 9600 baud and worked correctly. It also works
correctly with a KAM at 2400 Baud.
If you use a different rate instead of 1200, and plan to do binary
transfers, don't forget to customize the QZ*.BAT files.
18.24.3 TNC Data Bits
You can set the number of data bits on the RS-232 line between the
PC and TNC to 7 or 8. Use 7 with a TNC2 if you have problems with
Greek characters. Set this value to either 7 or 8.
18.24.4 TNC Parity
Use this parameter to set the Parity bit on the RS-232 line between
the PC and TNC. Enter the letter corresponding to the desired
parity. N = None, O = Odd, E = Even, M = Mark, S = Space.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 98
18.24.5 Number of TNC Stop Bits
You can set the number of stop bits on the RS-232 line between the
PC and the TNC to 1 or 2. Use 1 at all terminal (not packet) baud
rates except 300. Set this value to 1 or 2.
18.25 Change Colors
This option lets you change the default colors. A display of all of
the combinations is shown on the left side of the screen. You will
then be prompted to sequence through each window/message color that
can be customized. Enter the number shown in the combination window
followed by the "Enter" key to set a value. If you don't wish to
make a change, just press the "Enter" Key.
The following identifications are made to the color choices:
18.25.1 OutWindow Color
This is the color of the text (typed at the keyboard) in the
outgoing window.
18.25.2 StatusWindow Color
This is the color of the Status Window.
18.25.3 PromptWindow Color
This is the color of most of the menus.
18.25.4 LogWindow Color
This is the color of the text in the log window.
18.25.5 InWindow Color
This is the color of the text in the window showing the incoming
characters.
18.25.6 ScrollBack Window Color
This is the color of the text in the Scroll back window.
18.25.7 MHWindow Color
This is the color of the text in the monitor heard calls (MH)
window.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 99
18.25.8 Alarmwindow Color
This is the color of the text in the Error and Alarm window.
18.25.9 BottomWindow Color
This is the color of the text in the prompt line at the bottom of
the screen.
18.25.10 Emphasis Color
This is the color of the emphasized text in the Menu windows.
18.25.11 Prompt Color
This is the color of the prompt text in the Menu windows.
18.25.12 Option Color
This is the color of selected option text in the Menu windows.
18.25.13 Connected Text Color
This is the color of the text in the incoming window when connected
in the packet communications modes.
18.25.14 Computer Color
This is the color of the computer generated text in the outgoing
window when the Command Echo Flag option is enabled.
18.25.15 VHF Header Color
This is the color of the VHF Header lines in the Incoming window
when not connected.
18.25.16 HF Header Color
This is the color of the HF Header lines in the Incoming window
when not connected.
18.25.17 Alert Call Color
This is the color of the packet header lines containing the Alert
call in the Incoming window when not connected. It is also the color
of the non-permanent Parameter Menu prompts.
18.25.18 Outgoing Text Color
This is the color of the outgoing text echoed in the Incoming
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 100
window in the AMTOR Communications Mode.
18.25.19 Multi I/O Stream Color[1]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 1.
18.25.20 Multi I/O Stream Color[2]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 2.
18.25.21 Multi I/O Stream Color[3]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 3.
18.25.22 Multi I/O Stream Color[4]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 4.
18.25.23 Multi I/O Stream Color[5]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 5.
18.25.24 Multi I/O Stream Color[6]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 6.
18.25.25 Multi I/O Stream Color[7]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 7.
18.25.26 Multi I/O Stream Color[8]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 8.
18.25.27 Multi I/O Stream Color[9]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 9.
18.25.28 Multi I/O Stream Color[10]
This is the color of the text lines in the Incoming window in the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 101
Multiconnect Mode when connected to I/O stream 10.
When you change the colors, LAN-LINK does not overwrite all
existing windows. If you want to be sure of seeing the changed
colors, save the color changes using the Update option, and then
exit from and reload LAN-LINK.
18.26 Change SAREX Parameters
This sub-menu allows you to change the SAREX Ground Station
parameters, as described in the following paragraphs.
18.26.1 SAREX CallSign
This is the callsign of the SAREX station.
18.26.2 Change SAREX Capture to Disk File
This option lets you change the name of the SAREX Capture- to-disk
file. Don't change file names while "capture-to-disk" is in progress
(when a flashing "[S]" in present in the status window), or the old
one will stay open and may not close properly when LAN-LINK is
terminated, resulting in data loss.
18.27 Update Configuration File
Use this option to save the changes (permanently) in the
configuration file (LAN-LINK.SYS). Activate it twice to see most of
the changes.
18.28 Verify Changes
This feature lets you display how LAN-LINK was configured by the
LAN-LINK.SYS file. It also displays the state of any flags you have
set/reset if they are not already shown in the Status window or
Parameter Menu.
18.29 Change Scan Words
In the ZAP PBBS feature you can ask the program to scan the lines
read from the PBBS and if it sees any of the scan words in the line,
it will queue a request for that bulletin by number, and as of LAN-
LINK 2.10, change the color of the line. You can only set 16 such
Scan words (should be enough).
Use the "Delete" key to delete a word from the list.
Words that show up in the PBBS prompt line cannot be used as scan
words. For example, if your PBBS prompts you with
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 102
N4QQ PBBS>
then "N4QQ" and "BBS" should not be used as Scan Words. Don't leave
a blank line in the Scan Word section of the configuration file.
18.30 Turn Miscellaneous Flag ON/OFF
The Miscellaneous Flag performs several different functions in the
different Communications modes as follows.
18.30.1 All Modes:- Debug or state-sequence numbers
Shows two debug or state-sequence numbers in left hand corner of
the status window in the format N-M]. N is the BBS State and M is
the Communications State. These are used to figure out what went
wrong in the automatic sequences. If an automatic sequence fails to
work, set the miscellaneous flag, and observe the state in which
LAN-LINK seems to hang. It will be waiting for something, and you
should get a clue as to what, from Table 18.30.1. BBS State (N)
numbers are shown in Table 18.30.1-A and the Communications states
are shown in Table 18.30.1-B.
Table 18.30.1-A BBS States
1 Connected to BBS waiting for first '>'
2 Receiving incoming messages
3 Receiving list of new messages
4 Receiving your messages (in case missed some)
5 Custom command (i.e. KM)
6 LAN-LINK QTC Snatch in progress
7 Receiving Mail going to YOURCALL.OUT
8 :QDB: waiting for QRV/QNO
9 :QDB: sending file waiting for QSL/QNO
10 AUto UPload Opening BBS.BBS command file
11 AUto UPload sending one line command
12 AUto UPload sending subject line of message
13 AUto UPload sending message
14 AUto UPload waiting for last '>' before disconnecting
22 Receiving file
25 Packet cluster connect waiting for first '>'
26 Packet cluster connect waiting for first '>'
18.30.2 BAUDOT Mode:- Navy MARS Protocol Verify
When the flag is set, and the BAUDOT Navy MARS option is enabled,
the character string ":CR:" will be displayed in the outgoing window
each time a carriage return character is received in the incoming
window. Similarly, every time a line feed character is received, a
":LF:" will be displayed in the incoming window.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 103
You may use this feature to verify that another station is sending
files using the correct protocol. If you do, make sure that you tell
the PK-232 not to add a line feed to incoming carriage returns by
setting the ALFD parameter to OFF in the Command Mode. You will have
to set "ALFD ON" again when you change to other communications
modes, or all incoming lines will overwrite each other.
Table 18.30.1-B Communications States
0 Disconnected packet mode or normal non packet mode.
1 Connected in packet mode
2 Trying to connect in packet mode
3 Trying to disconnect in packet mode
4 Sending mail file in packet mode
5 ARQ called someone, or in QSO
6 Connected in autocq mode
7 Calling autocq in packet/pactor
8 Sending file in autocq
9 Waiting for reply in autocq packet/pactor
10 Autocq non packet sending CQ message
11 Autocq non packet waiting for reply
12 SELCAL waiting for ZCZC or YOURCALL
13 SELCAL waiting for NNNN
14 Autocq AMTOR sending bragtape
15 Autocq AMTOR receiving message
16 Autocq AMTOR requesting repeat of his_call
17 Autocq MFJ1278/KAM waiting for 73 to complete and sign off
21 QRU mode packet
22 Calling someone in pactor
25 AMTOR sending :QQQ: response
26 QRU mode packet
18.31 Change Band/Mode
This option is used to set the band and radio mode without invoking
the Log Menu. You can use it when changing bands on HF before
logging a new QSO. The value is not remembered when you shut LAN-
LINK down, unless you log the QSO.
18.32 Zap PBBS on Next Mail Beacon
This parameter causes LAN-LINK to Zap your local PBBS next time it
beacons with a list of calls for which it has Mail.
18.33 PBBS Zap, Don't Disconnect After Sequence
This parameter stops LAN-LINK from issuing the automatic disconnect
when the Zap sequence is over. You can set it during the Zap
sequence. Use it to stop the disconnect if the sequence gets out of
sync with the messages, or if there is something interesting you
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 104
wish to do to the PBBS. This parameter resets when the Zap sequence
terminates.
18.34 Turn Auto Answer ON/OFF
The Auto Answer parameter determines if the LAN-LINK.OUT file is
transmitted to an incoming packet connection or AMTOR link. If the
parameter is on, the file (if present) is transmitted, if the
parameter is off, the file is not transmitted.
19.0 Q Codes [NC/L]
This option displays help information about the use of the Network
Communications Language (NC/L) "Q" codes.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 105
20.0 COMMUNICATIONS MODES
This menu allows you to change the communications mode of the TNC.
If your TNC hardware cannot support those modes, don't bother to try
them. This is software not hardware, and in spite of what people
tell you, software can't do everything. The communications modes
shown in Figure 20 are available. Type in the single letter to make
your choice. While the KAM ports are set, and the MFJ-1278 ports are
defaulted in LAN-LINK (1 = VHF, 2 = HF), don't forget that YOU HAVE
to select the correct radio port on the PK-232.
20.1 VHF PACKET
This is the 1200 baud VHF Packet Mode. LAN-LINK will optimize the
TNC link parameters for this mode.
Figure 20 PK-232 Communications Mode Menu
V VHF PACKET
H HF PACKET
A AMTOR (STANDBY)
B BAUDOT (RTTY)
C MORSE (CW)
M AMTOR (MONITOR)
P PACTOR (STANDBY)
Q PACTOR (MONITOR)
S ASCII (RTTY)
N NAVTEX
G SIGNAL
20.2 HF PACKET
This is the 300 baud HF Packet Mode. LAN-LINK will optimize the TNC
link parameters for this Mode.
20.3 ASCII (RTTY)
This is the ASCII RTTY Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the TNC
parameters for this Mode at 110 baud.
20.4 BAUDOT (RTTY)
This is the BAUDOT RTTY Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the TNC
parameters for this Mode at 45 baud.
20.5 MORSE (CW)
This is the CW Mode. LAN-LINK will configure the TNC parameters for
this Mode at the default CW speed (20 for the PK-232 and MFJ-1278,
10 wpm for the KAM).
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 106
In this Mode the ALT-D Key will disengage the receive speed lock
inside the PK-232 to facilitate locking onto another signal and
Function Key 8 (F8) will turn the transmitter off.
LAN-LINK has a flag in the configuration file that lets you
configure the XMITOK parameter in the TNC. This flag allows you to
set XMITOK to "OFF" when you enter the CW communications mode, and
turn it "ON" again when you exit from the CW communications mode.
20.6 AMTOR (STANDBY)
When you select the AMTOR Standby Mode you are placed into the
"Standby Receive" Mode. If you are in AMTOR Standby Mode, you will
not be able to display signals of the Chirpcopy Mode (which means
that you will not be able to display a QSO in progress).
The Alt-D Key and Function Key 8 (F8) both toggle between the AMTOR
STANDBY and MONITOR communications modes.
20.7 AMTOR (MONITOR)
If you want to read the mail on an existing AMTOR QSO in progress,
select the AMTOR (MONITOR) or Chirpcopy Mode.
The Alt-D key and Function key 8 (F8) both toggle between the AMTOR
STANDBY and MONITOR communications modes.
20.8 PACTOR (STANDBY)
When you select the Pactor Standby Mode you are placed into the
"Standby Receive" Mode. If you are in Pactor Standby Mode, you will
not be able to display signals from a QSO in progress.
The Alt-D Key and Function Key 8 (F8) both toggle between the
Pactor STANDBY and MONITOR communications modes.
20.9 PACTOR (MONITOR)
If you want to read the mail on an existing Pactor QSO in progress,
select the Pactor STANDBY or Chirpcopy Mode.
The Alt-D key and Function key 8 (F8) both toggle between the
Pactor MONITOR and STANDBY communications modes.
20.10 SIGNAL
Use this option to select the TNC Automatic Signal Identification
Mode. Read the TNC documentation carefully to understand how this
mode works. Once the TNC has identified the digital signal it is
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 107
tuned to, use the Communications Mode Select Menu a second time to
select the relevant mode and then set the baud rates and shift to
display the data if necessary.
20.11 NAVTEX
Use this option to select the NAVTEX Mode. Read the TNC
documentation carefully to understand how this Mode works.
20.12 G-TOR
If you are using a KAM, you may use this option to select the G-TOR
Mode. Read the KAM documentation carefully to understand how this
mode works. If you are not using a KAM, this option will not show up
on your menu.
20.13 Manual
This option selects the HF logbook and copies the previous mode
entry in subsequent logging. Use this communications mode to log SSB
or FM contacts when monitoring the PacketCluster and working
stations spotted therein.
If you are using a PK-900 or DSP-2232, exercising the option will
also select a single incoming window.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 108
21.0 TERMINAL MODE MENU
This menu allows you to set the Terminal Configuration Mode. The
Terminal Menu provides different choices depending on which
communications mode you have selected.
21.1 Packet Terminal Menu
The Packet Terminal Mode of operation will be shown in the Status
window at the top of the screen. If you are reading the mail on a
station, the callsign of that station will be shown next to the word
"MAIL". If you are connected to someone, the call (and path) will be
shown prefixed by the "*>" sequence.
In the Packet Communications Mode, you are presented with the
choices shown in Figure 21.1. Type in the single letter to make your
choice.
Figure 21.1 Packet Terminal Menu
B Change Packet Baud Rate
C CQ/Beacons
E Everything
I Information
L Turn MCON ON
M Read the Mail
O Turn Meta Beacon ON
S Just My Station (Solo)
T All Traffic
0 Multiple User Connects
F Turn Conference ON
21.1.1 Change Packet Baud Rate
In the PACKET Mode you may change the RF baud rate between 300,
600, 1200 and 2400 baud. While LAN-LINK allows these baud rates, the
TNC may not.
21.1.2 CQ/Beacons
In this Mode, you will see CQ and BEACON packets on the channel.
This Mode only works on the PK-232 and the KAM.
21.1.3 Everything
You can set the TNC Mode to "Everything", i.e. show all packets on
the LAN.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 109
21.1.4 Read the Mail
You can read the mail on a PBBS or other station and get bulletins
without connecting to that station yourself. You use this Mode to do
so. You will be prompted for the call whose packets you wish to
monitor. Remember to enter the call of the station sending the
packets, not the call of the one receiving them. This mode only
works without showing the packet headers on the PK-232. On the other
TNCs the headers will also be displayed.
You can also use this command to monitor both sides (read the mail)
on a QSO on a busy packet channel.
You may want to turn the Digipeat Data Display Mode off when
reading the mail.
21.1.5 Just My Station (Solo)
In this Mode, you will only see messages addressed to you. You will
only get messages from people who connect to you.
21.1.6 All Traffic
In this Mode you will see all of the data packet traffic on
channel. You can use this Mode to check that the TNC is working.
21.1.7 Information Packets
In this Mode you will see all of the packet traffic on channel that
contain information. You can use this Mode to check that the TNC is
working.
21.1.8 Single User Connects
This is the normal one-on-one Mode of operation (USERS 1).
21.1.9 Multiple User Connects
When you are in a Multiple Connect Mode, an asterisk will be shown
in the status window next to the word "PACKET". Each I/O stream will
show up in the Inwindow in a different color.
LAN-LINK supports two multiple connect modes, Individual and
Conference.
An extract of an actual "off the air" CRT display (showing received
text only) in a multi-user mode is shown below. Each line of text as
received by the TNC is prefixed (by the PK-232) with the I/O channel
number and callsign of the station its connected with.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 110
1:4X4IL: *** CONNECTED to 4X4IL via 4X4IC, 4X6JP
0:4X4IC: joe do u read?
2:4Z4ZB: *** CONNECTED to 4Z4ZB
1:4X4IL: Look for me on PR via 4X6JP 73s and Shalom.
2:4Z4ZB: GE JOE I WILL DIS THEN U CAN GO VIA THE REP>
1: *** DISCONNECTED: 4X4IL via 4X4IC, 4X6JP
0:4X4IC: UNPROTO CQ
2:4Z4ZB: GO AHEAD BOYS...DE ALON..>
2: *** DISCONNECTED: 4Z4ZB
This is the normal Multi-connect Mode as described in the TNC
manual. Here you are connected to up to 10 stations and will send
different traffic to each of them. Each time you wish to send
something to a particular station, you must select the I/O channel
the station is connected on before typing the text or sending the
file.
The default stream change character for all TNCs in the VHF
multiple connect modes is "|" ($7C). In the KAM, it is "\" on HF and
"|" on VHF. They are both on the same key but one is in the shift
case. Be careful on HF as the "\" shows up in file directories and
confuses the computer. These values can be customized. However to do
so, they must be customized both in LAN-LINK and in the TNC at the
same time.
You select the I/O channel using the Alt-N key and moving the
cursor to the desired stream, or by typing the "|" character
followed by (in the TNC) the channel letter/number. For example to
do it manually, if you are connected to G8BTB on I/O channel 0 and
to G3ZCZ on I/O channel 1, then to talk to G8BTB you would type "|0"
before any text, and similarly to send something to G3ZCZ you would
type a "|1" before the text you"re going to send me. If you are not
using a PK-232, read the TNC manual to determine if the I/O streams
are identified by numbers or by letters. The TNC2 standard
configuration uses letters ("|A" etc.).
Use the Alt-N key and move the cursor up and down to select the I/O
channel automatically.
21.1.10 Conference
In the Conference Mode on the other hand, everything that you type
at the keyboard is automatically transmitted to each station that
you are connected with. Thus if you are linked to two stations each
line will be packeted twice by the TNC. You don't have to worry
about sending the wrong thing to the wrong person, as they will all
get the stuff.
You enter this Mode by selecting the "F" option in the Terminal
Menu. You terminate this Mode by selecting the "1" option.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 111
You connect in the usual manner using Alt-C or the Connect Option
in the Call Menu. You must wait for a connection to be established,
or to time out, before attempting to connect to the next station. If
you do not, you will get an error message back from the TNC.
In the Conference Mode, as the same text is transmitted on all I/O
channels, the throughput will be reduced. Slow down your typing
speed or use short packets. Should you check the link status or call
monitored list, you may not be able to get back into the Converse
Mode if you have too many packets outstanding. If that happens, wait
a while and then try to set the Converse Mode with Function Key 10
(F10). You may have to try it a few times, depending on how good
your links are.
Don't try to send a file in the conference mode, it is not designed
for it. Keep the packets short (use short lines). Be also warned
that if you use the conference bridge on bad links (such as crowded
HF channels, or VHF/UHF channels with lots of retries, the keyboard
may seem to lock up. This is because LAN-LINK has to wait for space
to appear in the TNC buffer before it can output the text.
The Conference Mode will only work in the PK-232 if DCDCONN is set
to ON. So if you are using a PK-232, LAN-LINK will do it for you
when you enter the Conference Terminal Mode in case you forgot
or/and haven't set the LAN-LINK.SYS file to include the line "DCD
ON". At the same time set LAN-LINK.SYS default states to show the
calls of other stations on each incoming line in the Multiconnect
modes (read the TNC manual on how to do this).
The Conference Mode will only work in the TNC2 if DCDCONN is
jumpered so that Pin 8 of the RS-232 Interface changes state when
you connect to someone else. If you get error messages and see the
characters "|J" on your screen, then the jumper probably isn't set.
The Conference Mode does not work on the TNC1.
In the Conference Mode, if any one of the stations disconnects, the
TNC will return to the Command Mode, and you must use Function Key
10 (F10) to return to the Converse Mode before you type another
character of text.
21.1.10 Conference Bridge ON/OFF
This option toggles the Conference Bridge ON and OFF. In the Bridge
Multiconnect Mode you are acting as a central switch. You can link
together up to 10 stations in one multi-way connection. In this Mode
any packets arriving on any stream are echoed to all other streams
that you have "connects" on except the one that they came in on.
Anything you type will be sent to all connected streams.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 112
In this manner, all stations will not see their own text echoed
back. Each line of text output by LAN-LINK in this Mode will contain
the callsign of the station originating the packet. Your packets
will contain your call as entered in line 1 of the LAN- LINK.SYS
file. Thus for example, if your call was KB8RP/4X and normally shows
up in the packet header as KB8RP here it will show in the data as
KB8RP/4X.
Just remember that the Bridge puts out a lot of packets, so do
multi-way connects on a quiet frequency. You must be in the
Conference Mode to turn the bridge on, and any disconnect will take
the bridge down. Should that happen, toggle it on again. A bridge
will be shown in the status window whenever the Conference Bridge is
up.
21.1.11 Turn Metabeacon ON/OFF
This option lets you turn the LAN-LINK Metabeacon ON and OFF. LAN-
LINK provides you with a metabeacon, that gives you the capability
to transmit a long beacon message at periodic intervals. The
Metabeacon is loaded from the contents of one of the LAN-LINK.00n
files. These files may be created by the LAN-LINK editor. When
loading, LAN-LINK will insert a pass character (^V) into the text
before a carriage return, so as not to end the packet before at
least 240 characters, and not more than 255 characters have been
output to the TNC. The maximum number of characters that can be
loaded into the Metabeacon is 1776. The maximum number of packets in
a Metabeacon is 7. You can also force a hard carriage return or "end
of packet" in the Metabeacon by inserting the "\" (backslash)
character, which will not be transmitted, into the text.
The frequency of Metabeacon transmissions is the same as that of
the automatic CQ timer.
The MetaBeacon is designed for special event stations. PLEASE do
not abuse it.
21.2 AMTOR Terminal Menu
In the AMTOR Communications Mode, you are presented with the
choices shown in Figure 21.2. Type in the single letter to make your
choice.
Figure 21.2 AMTOR Menu
L Force LETTERS Case
R Set ROBOT/Mailbox
W CW Identification
Z Set ROBOT Infinite Delay
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 113
21.2.1 Force LETTERS Case
This option lets you force the PK-232 receiver to the letters case
if for some reason you appear to be in the numbers case. It will
return you to the Converse Mode.
If your TNC allows you to use a control character (^L) to force the
letters case, you don't need to go through all these menu layers to
do the job.
21.2.2 Set ROBOT/Mailbox
This option lets you turn on the Mailbox during a regular AMTOR QSO
so that the other station can leave a message or download a file
remotely. You must only use it when the other station is sending
text.
21.2.3 CW Identification
This option only works on the PK-232. You use it to send a CW
identification (CWID). The CWID is sent in the FEC Mode. The CWID
consists of the sequence "DE YOURCALLSIGN" where YOURCALLSIGN is
that entered into the PK-232 as "MYCALL".
You use this feature if your license requires you to identify in
Morse code as well as in the operating mode.
21.2.4 Set ROBOT Infinite Delay
You use this option to prevent the Robot from ever transmitting
when not linked. In the normal manner, the Robot counts down the CQ
delay parameter, and, when it gets down to 0, puts a CQ call on the
air. If the Infinite Delay is set, the CQ call will be inhibited.
This option thus puts the Robot into an indefinite wait mode where
it thinks it has sent out a CQ call and is waiting for a reply.
You would use this Mode if you want to set up a MailBox on a known
frequency for some group or organization.
21.3 Baudot Terminal Menu
In the Baudot Communications Mode, you are presented with the
choices shown in Figure 21.3. Type in the single letter to make your
choice.
Figure 21.3 BAUDOT Menu
B Set Baud Rate
F Select Shift
N Turn NAVY MARS Message Protocol ON/OFF
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 114
U USOS ON/OFF
K Turn SELCAL ON/OFF
W CW Identification
21.3.1 Set Baud Rate
This feature allows you to set a desired communications baud rate
directly. You will be prompted to enter the desired rate. Use this
command to avoid having to shift through too many intermediate
states, if for example, you want to make a direct change from 45 to
100 baud.
21.3.2 Select Shift
This feature lets you select Wide (850 Hz) or narrow (170 Hz) shift
directly. The PK-232 will copy 170 Hz signals using its internal 200
Hz circuitry. If you have a KAM, you may also select the Commercial
Shift (425 Hz).
The shift is displayed in the status window at the top of the
screen. It is shown as "W"", "N" or "C" for wide, narrow or commer-
cial respectively.
21.3.3 NAVY MARS Message Protocol
The Navy MARS option toggles the Navy MARS Mode ON and OFF. When
the Navy MARS option is active, an "[N]" will be displayed in the
status window, and the feature performs the protocol described
below.
21.3.3.1: Any Carriage Return or Enter (CR) from the keyboard is
sent as CR, CR. (two sequential CR characters.
21.3.3.2: In a file transmission lines are terminated by a CR, CR,
LF (Line Feed) sequence.
21.3.3.3: In a file transmission, blank lines are sent as a LF
(without a CR).
21.3.3.4: In a file transmission, a plus sign "+" in the file is
replaced by a sequence of 12 "letters" characters. There can be more
than one + sign on a line.
21.3.3.5: In a file transmission, the sequence "NNNN" is transmitted
followed by a sequence of 12 "letters" characters. There can only be
one "NNNN" sequence on a line.
21.3.4 USOS ON/OFF
This option toggles the Unshift on space (USOS) feature ON and OFF.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 115
When the USOS is on, the TNC reverts to the letters shift each time
a "space" character is received. It helps when displaying noisy
copy.
If USOS is active, "USOS" will be shown in the status window at the
top of the screen.
21.3.5 SELCAL ON/OFF
This command key toggles the SELCAL feature ON and OFF. When the
SELCAL is activated, as shown in the status window, the incoming
text from the TNC is scanned. When either the letters "ZCZC" or
"your callsign" (as entered in line 1 of the LAN- LINK.SYS file) is
received, the "capture-to-disk" is turned on. All subsequent text
will be stored in the LAN- LINK.RUN file until the letters "NNNN"
are received. At that time the "capture-to-disk" is turned off.
You may use this feature when monitoring commercial RTTY broadcasts
to record news and other information, or when calling CQ to start
recording all incoming text and keep the QSO on disk.
You may use Function Key 1 (F1) to turn the capture to disk
permanently on to override the automatic turnoff if you wish.
21.3.6 CW Identification
This option is used to send a CW identification. You use this if
your license requires you to identify in Morse Code as well as in
the operating mode.
The identification consists of the sequence "DE YOURCALLSIGN" where
your callsign is that entered into the TNC as "MYCALL".
21.4 ASCII Terminal Menu
In the ASCII Communications Mode, you are presented with the
choices shown in Figure 21.4. Type in the single letter to make your
choice.
Figure 21.4 ASCII Menu
B Set Baud Rate
F Select Shift
K Turn SELCAL ON/OFF
W CW Identification
21.4.1 Set Baud Rate
This feature allows you to set a desired communications baud rate
directly. You will be prompted to enter the desired rate. Use this
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 116
command to avoid having to shift through too many intermediate
states. For example, if you want to make a direct change from 110 to
1200 baud.
21.4.2 Select Shift
This feature lets you select Wide (850 Hz) or narrow (170 Hz) shift
directly. The PK-232 will copy 170 Hz signals using its internal 200
Hz circuitry. If you have a KAM, you may also select the Commercial
Shift (425 Hz).
The shift is displayed in the status window at the top of the
screen. It is shown as "W", "N" or "C" for wide, narrow or commer-
cial respectively.
21.4.3 SELCAL ON/OFF
This command key toggles the SELCAL feature ON and OFF. When the
SELCAL is activated, as shown in the status window, the incoming
text from the TNC is scanned. When either the letters "ZCZC" or
"YOURCALLSIGN" (as entered in line 1 of the LAN-LINK.SYS file) is
received, the "capture-to-disk" is turned on. All subsequent text
will be stored in the LAN-LINK.RUN disk file until the letters
"NNNN" are received. At that time the "capture-to-disk" is turned
off.
You may use Function Key 1 (F1) to turn the capture to disk
permanently on to override the automatic turnoff if you wish.
21.4.4 CW Identification
This option is used to send a CW identification. You use this if
your license requires you to identify in Morse code as well as in
the operating mode.
The identification consists of the sequence "DE YOURCALLSIGN" where
your callsign is that entered into the TNC as "MYCALL".
21.5 CW Menu
In the CW Communications Mode, you are presented with the Menu
shown in Figure 21.5. Type in the single letter to make your choice.
Figure 21.5 CW Menu
L Lock to Receive Signal
S Set Morse Speed
U Unlock Morse Speed
X Turn XMIT Flag ON/OFF
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 117
21.5.1 Lock to Receive Signal
This option locks the TNC to the speed of the incoming CW signal.
21.5.2 Set Morse Speed
This option lets you set the CW speed.
21.5.3 Unlock Morse Speed
This option unlocks the TNC from the incoming CW signal. It
performs the same task as the Alt-D option keys. It is used to speed
up capture of a new signal or to break the lock when the TNC appears
to have locked up at the wrong speed.
21.6 Pactor Terminal Menu
In the Pactor Communications Mode, you are presented with the
choices shown in Figure 21.6. Type in the single letter to make your
choice. Do not use any of these options when linked to another
station or you may drop the link.
Figure 21.6 Pactor Menu
0 AUTO BAUD
1 Force 100 BAUD
2 Force 200 BAUD
H Enable Huffman
K Disable Huffman
21.6.1 AUTO BAUD
This option configures the TNC to switch between 100 and 200 baud
on the HF Pactor link as determined by propagation Conditions.
21.6.2 Force 100 Baud
This option forces the TNC to use 100 baud on the HF Pactor link as
determined by propagation Conditions.
21.6.3 Force 200 Baud
This option forces the TNC to use 200 baud on the HF Pactor link as
determined by propagation Conditions. This option is only available
for the KAM.
21.6.4 Enable Huffman
This option enables Huffman compression of the transmitted text.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 118
21.6.5 Disable Huffman
This option disables Huffman compression of the transmitted text.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 119
22.0 EXIT TO DOS
When you exit the program and return to DOS, if the Shut down (QRT)
flag is set to 0, the TNC is put into the VHF default mode in which
it rejects calls from any other stations. (Read about the CFROM
and/or CONOK command in the TNC manual). You can, if you wish, leave
the TNC powered, and, if you also leave the VHF radio powered up,
you will be active as a digipeater, but at the same time anyone
trying to connect with you will receive a "busy signal". The MBX
command (Reading the Mail) is also cleared at this time.
If you want to leave the TNC set up to accept messages when LAN-
LINK is not active, customize the shut down state as described in
Section 18.23.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 120
23.0 THE ELMER MENU
ELMER is a smart server or second operator feature described in
Appendix 7. The ELMER Menu presents you with the choices shown in
Figure 23. Type in the single letter to make your choice.
Figure 23 The ELMER Menu
C Change ELMER File
E Turn ELMER ON/OFF
L Load ELMER.QSO
P Pick File to edit
S Edit ELMER.QSO
T show state Table
23.1 Change ELMER File
This option allows you to change the ELMER state table file.
23.2 Turn ELMER ON/OFF
This option allows you to turn ELMER ON and OFF. If the ELMER state
table file (ELMER.QSO) is not present, you will not be able to
activate ELMER.
23.3 Load State Table (ELMER.QSO)
This option allows you to reload the state table. The name of the
state table will appear in the menu.
23.4 Pick File to Edit
This option allows you to pick and edit, a file with the default
filetype of "TXT".
23.5 Edit State Table (ELMER.QSO)
This option allows you to edit the state table.
23.6 Show State Table
This option allows you to see the contents of the state machine. It
is used in debugging the logic to ensure that the contents of the
table match what you thought you put into it. A typical set of
contents appears as shown in Figure 23.1. The keywords have been
capitalized and set to 15 characters wide. None existent characters
have been represented as periods.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 121
Figure 23.1 Typical ELMER State Table
╔ ═ L═ ╦ ═ C═ ╦ ═ N═ ╦ ═ R═ ╦ ═ E═ ╦ ═ ═ ═ ═ KEYWORD═ ═ ═ ═ ╦ ═ U═ ╦ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ FILE═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ═ ╗
║ 0║ 1║ 2║ 0 ║ 0║ WHAT...........║ 0 ║ * ║
║ 1║ 2║ 3║ 0 ║ 0║ ENGLISHMAN.....║ 0 ║ * ║
║ 2║ 2║ 100║ 0 ║ 0║ SYSTEMS........║ 0 ║ * ║
║ 3║ 3║ 4║ 0 ║ 0║ DOING..........║ 0 ║ * ║
║ 4║ 4║ 1║ 0 ║ 0║ COUNTRY........║ 0 ║ ME-USA.TXT ║
║ 5║ 1║ 1║ 0 ║ 0║ EQUIPMENT......║ 0 ║ PK232COM.TXT ║
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 122
24.0 RADIO MENU
The Radio Menu provides you with the capability to exercise the
interface to a Kenwood Radio. The options available are shown in
Figure 24-1. Type the single letter to make your choice. All
commands will be ignored if the radio is not enabled. The radio
interface is automatically enabled at LAN-LINK initialization time.
Figure 24-1 The Kenwood Radio Menu
F Select VFO A/B
M Set Radio Mode
Q Turn Flag QSY ON/OFF or N/A
R Read VFO A Frequency
S Set Frequency
V Speak Frequency
24.1 Select VFO A/B
This option sets the VFO that will be interrogated or set by LAN-
LINK.
24.2 Set Radio Mode
This option sets the radio mode (USB, LSB, FM, CW etc.). You will
be prompted to supply the mode.
24.3 Turn Flag QSY ON/OFF or N/A
This option set the QSY Flag as follows:
N/A Radio is not enabled
ON QSY to the frequency of a DX Alert (if in PacketCluster
mode)
OFF Don't QSY in response to a DX Alert
24.4 Read VFO Frequency
This option reads and displays the frequency of the selected VFO.
24.5 Set VFO Frequency
This option sets the frequency of the selected VFO. You will be
prompted to supply the frequency.
24.6 Speak VFO Frequency
This option sends a command to the radio to announce the frequency
of the selected VFO. If the radio is equipped with a voice
annunciator the radio will announce the frequency. If the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 123
radio can't speak, the command will be ignored.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 124
Appendix 3 LAN-LINK Disk Files
The following disk files are associated with the LAN-LINK program.
LAN-LINK.COM
LAN-LINK.SYS
*.RUN
LAN-LINK.LOG
LAN-LINK.DIR
CONFIG.SYS
*.MBX
*.BBS
LAN-LINK.001 .. LAN-LINK.010
QBU-RX.BAT
QBU-TX.BAT
LAN-LINK.QTA
QZ*.BAT
ELMER.QSO
LAN-LINK.OUT
*.DMO
*.CQ
The "*" represents a "wildcard" character in the manner of DOS.
Consider each file in turn.
1.0 LAN-LINK.EXE
This is the program. You activate it from DOS by typing the word
"LAN-LINK" followed by "ENTER" in the normal manner of invoking DOS
commands.
2.0 LAN-LINK.SYS
This file contains the configuration information for both the
program and the TNC. Use the customization options in the parameters
menu to make any changes not taken care of in the INSTALL program.
The contents of the default file together with an item number are
shown below.
1. Callsign
2. Selcal
3. CQ Text
4. CTEXT Line
5. ELMER Flag
6. CQ Delay (seconds)
7. CQ Delay (minutes)
8. :QSP: Message Relay Flag
9. PC Serial Communications Port Number
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 125
10. TNC Type
11. PC to TNC Baud Rate
12. VHF Log Book File
13. HF Log Book File
14. GMT Offset
15. Path Directory File name
16. Brag Tape File name
17. PBBS Snatch Mail Trigger Word
18. QTC Snatch Flag
19. PBBS Snatch Flag
20. Shut Down Mode
21. PC to TNC Data Bits
22. PC to TNC Parity Bit
23. PC to TNC Stop Bits
24. DCD Flag
25. QBM Download Sub-directory
26. Run File Directory Path
27. PBBS Read Request Command
28. Local PBBS Callsign
29. SAREX Callsign
30. SAREX Capture to Disk File name
31. PacketCluster Call
32. TNC Specific Parameters
33. Node Drop Link Flag
34. Sound Flag
35. Display Computer Generated Commands Flag
36. Date/timestamp in Call Sequence Flag
37. Keyboard Character Beep value.
38. :QBU: Receiving Station Batch file (QBU-RX.BAT)
39. :QBU: Originating Station Batch file (QBU-TX.BAT)
40. Capture-to-disk Flag
41. Beacon Control/LAN-LINK handshake Flag
42. Read Bulletin Character
43. PBBS Subject String
44. PBBS Message String
45. VHF Paclen
46. HF Paclen
47. Beacon Time
48. Number of CQ Lines
49. Word wrap
50. PC Port 4 Custom Address
51. PC Port 4 Custom IRQ
52. VHF Stream switch character
53. HF Stream switch character
54. TNC Error message
55. Connect Timeout Delay
56. Custom Prompt
57. ELMER Configuration File
58. Expand Transmitted File flag
59. Input Message Base Count
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 126
60. Default users
61-88. Custom Colors
89. First PacketCluster Command
90. Second PacketCluster Command
91. TNC Mailbox ON Command
92. TNC Mailbox OFF Command
93. VHF Maxframe Command
94. HF Maxframe Command
95. Inhibit VHF Logging Flag
96. Inhibit HF Logging Flag
97. Printer Permanent Flag
98. Log Disk Update Flag
99. Secondary Log Flag
100. Auto Answer Flag
101. RUN File Disk Update Flag
102. Default CW Speed
103. Secondary Logbook
104. BBS List Command
105. BBS List Mine Command
106. BBS Custom Command
107. BBS Bye Command
108. Start Up Packet Terminal Mode
109. Page Time (:QIC: Seconds)
110. Packet Cluster DX Alert Tone CW Dit time
111. Packet Cluster DX Alert Tone CW Note
112. Packet Cluster DX Alert Mode
113. Mode File Flag
114. BAUDOT Color Change Text String
115. Default RTTY Baud Rate
Lines 116 to 123 (inclusive) apply to the DSP-2232 and PK-900 only
but must be present in all SYS files.
116. Dual Window Flag
117. TNC String for Modem 9600 baud packet
118. TNC String for Modem 1200 baud packet
119. TNC String for Modem RTTY
120. TNC String for Modem 300 baud packet
121. TNC String for Modem RTTY and 1200 baud packet
122. TNC String for Modem 300 baud and 1200 baud packet
123. TNC String for Modem Fuji
124. Delay after a command line
125. Radio Name
126. Radio Port
127. Radio Port baud rate
128. Radio Port Data Bits
129. Radio Port Stop Bits
130. Radio Port Parity
131. Radio Address
132. Flag QSY
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 127
133. Flag DX Alert Prefix Check
134. Start of band parameters for DX Alert message log search
135. * end of band parameters; modes for DX Alert message log search
136. Start of Scan Words (MUST HAVE AT LEAST ONE)
137. * end of Scan Words
138. Start of Common Calls (MUST HAVE AT LEAST ONE)
139. * end of Common Calls
140. Remaining TNC start up Commands.
The contents of each line are described in the section of the
Parameters menu which deals with customizing them. The others,
described below, can only be changed by using the Editor. The
remaining lines contain commands to the TNC. For further information
about them refer to the TNC manual. LAN-LINK assumes different
defaults (in some instances) to those set in the TNC. The LAN-
LINK.SYS file contains only those that are different to the TNC
default reset state.
2.1 CTEXT Line
This parameter is the CTEXT line changed in the TNC Menu.
2.2 ELMER Flag
This parameter is the ELMER Flag. If it is a "1", ELMER is primed
for activity. ELMER is only active in the Packet communications
mode, when you are connected to another station. If the ELMER flag
is a "0", or the ELMER state table file is not present in the
default directory, LAN-LINK will never activate ELMER.
2.3 PC Port 4 Custom Address
This parameter is the decimal value of the address of your Port 4.
Use this parameter if you are using a non standard Serial I/O card.
Configure the PC Port to 4. The PC default address for Com4 is 2E8
(hex) or 744 (decimal).
2.4 PC Port 4 Custom IRQ
This parameter is the decimal value of the IRQ of your Port 4. Use
this parameter if you are using a non standard Serial I/O card.
Configure the PC Port to 4. The PC default IRQ for Com4 is 3.
2.5 VHF Stream Switch Character
This parameter is the VHF stream switch character. If you wish to
change it, you must enter the ASCII representation in this line, and
the equivalent stream switch command in the LAN-LINK.SYS file.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 128
2.6 HF Stream Switch Character
This parameter is the HF stream switch character. If you wish to
change it, you must enter the ASCII representation in this line, and
the equivalent stream switch command in the LAN-LINK.SYS file. The
KAM is currently the only TNC that has different HF and VHF stream
switch characters.
2.7 TNC Error Message
This parameter is the error message your TNC generates. The PK-232
generates "?What?". Others may generate "EV?" or "?EH".
2.8 Connect Timeout Delay
This parameter is the time, in minutes, LAN-LINK lets you stay
connected to another packet station, after the receipt of the last
incoming character.
2.9 ELMER Configuration File
This parameter is the name of the default ELMER Configuration file.
It is changed through the ELMER Menu.
2.10 Expand Transmitted Files Flag
The Flag tells LAN-LINK to scan the outgoing text when a file is
transmitted and perform the same conversions it does to the contest
text. You can insert the '##', '#1', '#N' and '#T' parameters in the
files to transmit, your call sign, the other station's call, and the
time of day. Set this parameter to 1 to enable the feature, 0 to
disable it.
2.11 First PacketCluster Command
This parameter is the first command (up to 20 characters) LAN-LINK
sends to the PacketCluster after receiving a ">" character at the
end of line from the PacketCluster.
2.12 Second PacketCluster Command
This parameter is the second command (up to 20 characters) LAN-LINK
sends to the PacketCluster after receiving a ">" character at the
end of line from the PacketCluster.
2.13 TNC Mailbox ON Command
This parameter is the command (up to 15 characters) your TNC
expects to turn its internal mailbox ON.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 129
2.14 TNC Mailbox OFF Command
This parameter is the command (up to 15 characters) your TNC
expects to turn its internal mailbox OFF.
2.15 VHF Maxframe Command
This parameter is the command (up to 15 characters) your TNC
expects to set the VHF MAXFRAME parameter.
2.16 HF Maxframe Command
This parameter is the command (up to 15 characters) your TNC
expects to set the HF MAXFRAME parameter.
2.17 Inhibit VHF Logging Flag
When set to 1, automatic VHF Logging is disabled.
2.18 Inhibit HF Logging Flag
When set to 1, automatic HF Logging is disabled.
2.19 Printer Permanent Flag
When clear (set to 0), if you leave the printer on during a packet
connect, it will stop printing when you disconnect. This stops the
printer generating lots of garbage. If you set this parameter to 1,
the printer will not stop printing when you disconnect.
2.20 Log Disk Update Flag
If this flag is set to 1, LAN-LINK writes each log entry to disk as
you enter it. If this flag is not set (=0), LAN-LINK writes the log
entry to a buffer and updates the disk when the program is
terminated. Set the flag ON to ensure that rare DX contact is
logged, Set it OFF for speed, or if power dropouts are not a problem
in your area.
2.21 Secondary Log Flag
If this Flag is set to 1, LAN-LINK allows you to search both the
current log book and a secondary logbook for the call of a station.
2.22 Auto Answer Flag
If this flag is set to 1, AND you have a LAN-LINK.OUT file on your
system, LAN-LINK will transmit the contents of the LAN-LINK.OUT file
to every incoming connection.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 130
2.23 Ctdsk File Disk Update Flag
If this flag is set to 1, LAN-LINK will close the capture-to-disk
file (YYMMDD.RUN) between received messages. If the flag is not set,
LAN-LINK will close the file when all messages have been received,
or a DISCONNECT takes place.
2.24 Default CW Speed
This is the default CW speed for the multi-mode TNC (KAM, PK-232 or
MFJ1278).
2.25 Secondary Logbook
This is the name of the secondary logbook.
2.26 BBS List Command
This is the BBS List Command. The default value is 'L'.
2.27 BBS List Mine Command
This is the BBS List Mine Command. The default value is 'LM'.
2.28 BBS Custom Command
This is a configurable BBS List Command. The default value is 'KM'.
2.29 BBS Bye Command
This is the BBS Bye Command. Change this parameter when the default
'B' command only drops you to the Node.
2.30 Start Up Packet Terminal Mode
This is the Packet Terminal Mode when LAN-LINK is first activated.
Set this to the letter corresponding to the terminal mode you like
being in. See Appendix A, Section 21.1. Use the corresponding
letter, as shown in Table 2.30.
Table 2.30 Start Up Terminal Mode
Letter Mode Actions
I INFO lets you only see packets containing information.
S SOLO lets you only see messages addressed to you.
C CQ/B lets you see beacons and CQ calls as well.
T TRFC lets you see packets containing messages as well.
E EVRY lets you see everything on channel, including the
link control packets.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 131
2.31 Page Time (:QIC: Seconds)
This is the number of seconds the system pages the operator in
response to a QIC command, if the sound is turned on.
2.32 PacketCluster DX Alert Tone CW Dit time
This is the time period for 1 dit sound in the PacketCluster
audible DX alert message.
2.33 Packet Cluster DX Alert Tone CW Note
This is the tone for the PacketCluster audible DX alert message.
2.34 Mode File Flag
If this flag is set, LAN-LINK will change the name of the LAN-
LINK.001 to LAN-LINK.010 when you change communications modes. The
name will change to the mode followed by a number, i.e BAUDOT.001 to
BAUDOT.002, or AMTOR.001 to AMTOR.002.
2.35 BAUDOT Color Change Text String
This is a pair of characters that LAN-LINK will scan text appearing
in the incoming window for. When LAN-LINK recognizes the pair, it
will change colors. This parameter is customizable to allow you to
override apparent random changes of color, since there is no agreed
standard way for signalling 'over' in BAUDOT.
2.36 Dual Window Flag
This flag applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. If this flag is
set, LAN-LINK separates out the text streams coming from each port
and directs them to two separate windows. If the flag is cleared,
the text streams are combined into a single incoming window.
2.37 TNC String for Modem 9600 baud
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working 9600 baud packet.
2.38 TNC String for Modem 1200 baud
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working 1200 baud packet.
2.39 TNC String for Modem RTTY
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working HF RTTY.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 132
2.40 TNC String for Modem 300 baud
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working 300 baud HF packet.
2.41 TNC String for Modem RTTY and 1200 baud
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working simultaneous HF RTTY
and VHF 1200 baud packet.
2.42 TNC String for Modem 300 baud and 1200 baud
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for simultaneous HF 300 baud packet
and 1200 baud VHF packet.
2.43 TNC String for Modem Fuji
This item applies to the PK-900 and DSP 2232 only. This is the
command used to select the modem for working Fuji 1200 baud PSK
packet.
2.44 Delay after a command line
This item is the number of milliseconds to wait between sending
lines to the TNC output buffer.
2.45 Radio Name
This item is the name of the Radio. Kenwood has been tested, Icom
may work (coded but not tested). If this is not set to Kenwood or
Icom, the Radio functions are disabled.
2.46 Radio Port
This item is the serial port for the Radio (1 to 4). If set to 0,
the Radio functions are disabled.
2.47 Radio Port baud rate
This item is the serial port baud rate for the Radio. Check the
correct value in the Radio manual.
2.48 Radio Port Data Bits
This item is the number of data bits on the serial port for the
Radio. Check the correct value in the Radio manual.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 133
2.49 Radio Port Stop Bits
This item is the number of stop bits on the serial port for the
Radio. Check the correct value in the Radio manual.
2.50 Radio Port Parity
This item is the parity value on the serial port for the Radio.
Check the correct value in the Radio manual.
2.51 Radio Address
This item is ignored for Kenwood radios. For Icom, it is the
decimal value of the radio address. Check the correct value in the
Radio manual.
2.52 Flag QSY
If the flag is set, LAN-LINK tunes the radio to the frequency of
the PacketCluster DX Alert message automatically.
2.53 Flag DX Alert Prefix Check
This flag determines how LAN-LINK responds to a DX Alert message.
If the flag is set, LAN-LINK checks to see of the prefix is in the
log.
2.54 Band parameters for DX Alert message log search
These lines contain the band, reference frequency (Hz), low and
high band search flags. Each element is separated by a ","
character. The elements can be changed via the Radio Menu. Typical
values are:
10, 28300000.0,Y,Y
12, 24930000.0,Y,N
15, 21200000.0,Y,Y
17, 18110000.0,Y,Y
LAN-LINK checks the frequency of the DX Alert message to see if
there is a match on any of these lines. If there is, then LAN-LINK
compares the frequency with the value on the corresponding line to
determine if the DX Alert frequency is higher or lower than the
reference frequency.
If the frequency is lower than the reference, and the low band
search flag is "Y", LAN-LINK will check to logbook to see if the
prefix is in the log.
Similarly, if the frequency is higher than the reference, and the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 134
high band search flag is "Y", LAN-LINK will check to logbook to see
if the prefix is in the log.
If LAN-LINK does not find a match, the check mark is displayed.
2.55 Modes for DX Alert message log search
This line marks the end of the band parameters for DX Alert message
log search with the *. It then contains the communications modes
corresponding to the low and the high parts of the band. Typical
values are:
*,CW,SSB
2.56 TNC Parameters
The remaining lines contains parameters loaded into the TNC at
initialization.
If you are not using a TNC1 you MUST set the HEADERLN parameter to
ON. The packet headers and the text of the packets must show up on
your screen on separate lines. You must also have the "Echo as Sent"
feature set ON ("EAS ON" for PK-232 and "XM" ON " for the KAM).
3.0 *.RUN
These files contain incoming data from the TNC recorded while the
"capture-to-disk" function was active. LAN-LINK names them as
YYMMDD.RUN automatically (YY = Year, MM = Month, DD = Date, i.e.
920903.RUN is a file for 3 Sept 1992).
4.0 *.DBF (HF.DBF and VHF.DBF)
These files contain the log entries. They are Dbase 3 and 4
compatible. The format of the logbook file is the same as that used
by the LOGBOOK package of the PC-HAM software package, with a little
additional space for comments.
5.0 LAN-LINK.DIR
This is the directory file. You use it to store names, handles,
NET/ROM, TheNet, KA-Node, ROSE or digipeat paths as well as
name/callsign relationships. Sample lines are shown below.
Joe G3ZCZ
Alon 4Z4ZB V 4X6AA
Milt 4X6AA
LR 4X6LR
hf-il 4x4hf v 4z4zb 4x4il
hf-rj 4x4hf v 4z4zb 4z4rj
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 135
K1HTV ELK v WB4APR-5! SNJ3! NNJ! WMA! SCCT!K1HTV
w9tnn-2 jrw !% w3eax-7 !& w9tnn-2
You create this file with the Editor or by using your word
processor in its non-document mode. You must leave at least one
space character between the first (key) word and the connect path.
When you type in the key word, the program does not care about upper
or lower case.
You may also use the "reMember Path" option in the Call Menu to
make entries in this file.
If you already have a YAPP.DIR or a PK232COM.DIR file just rename
it to LAN-LINK.DIR and add any NET/ROM and/or KA-Node paths.
All path entries in LAN-LINK.DIR must be on a single 80 column
line.
6.0 CONFIG.SYS
If you are going to use the logging features, you must have a
CONFIG.SYS file on the boot disk. This file must contain the line
FILES = 20.
See the DOS manual for more information about the CONFIG.SYS file.
7.0 *.MBX
These are the files associated with the stations you have
designated as LAN store and forward mailboxes. Other stations can
only :QRU: with you if you have designated them as QRU stations and
have a "CALLSIGN.MBX" file on your disk. For example, if you want to
use 4Z4ZB as a store and forward mailbox, you will have to create an
ASCII file called 4Z4ZB.MBX using Editor, or the non-document mode
of your word processor. In this file you will put a list of the call
signs of the stations 4Z4ZB can connect with reliably. For example,
if you want 4Z4ZB to be able to store messages from you to 4X6AA,
4X6LR, G3ZCZ, ON8IK, F0WN,and G8BTB, you would put those call signs
in the file, one call on a line as follows.
4X6AA
4X6LR
G3ZCZ
ON8IK
F0WN
G8BTB
When the QRU function is invoked either by you manually or by 4Z4ZB
connecting to you and sending you the command :QRU:, any message
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 136
files present on your system addressed to any of those stations
(E.G. G3ZCZ.OUT and ON8IK.OUT) will be transferred from you to 4Z4ZB
just as if you had tried to :QSP: the messages manually or as if
G3ZCZ or ON8IK had connected directly to you. The file names on your
system will be changed to *.OLD.
You must create one file for each designated store and forward
station, i.e. 4Z4ZB.MBX, G3ZCZ.MBX etc.
8.0 *.BBS
These are LOCAL-BBS.BBS AUTO-Upload Command files. Each file is
named for the callsign of the BBS that you wish to access. It must
have exactly the name as the callsign of the BBS. If the BBS is
W9TNN-1 the name of the file must be W9TNN-1.BBS, or if the BBS is
4Z4ZB then the file must be called 4Z4ZB.BBS. The file must be an
ASCII file. that means the word processor must be used in the non-
document mode to create it.
This file contains the command sequence that you would have typed
at the keyboard if you were accessing the BBS manually. The ONE
difference is that the text of a message you are uploading with the
S command must be followed by the character strings ":EOF:" or "/EX"
(on a separate line) as illustrated by the example below.
If you use the "D" command to download a text file, the file will
end up in a separate file on your disk ONLY IF a file of the same
name does not exist on your drive.
Do delete "read" mail from your local PBBS. Don't clutter the PBBS's
disk with your read mail. The "LM" command is built into LAN-LINK to
remind you of what you have out there.
The PBBS "S" command (including its variations such as "SP") is the
only multiple line command allowed. You can put all the single line
commands such as "D", "H", "?", "L", and "R" in the PBBS.BBS file.
A "multiple command" is defined in this instance as a command which
allows you to enter multiple lines before the PBBS will send back a
">" character (i.e. one that the PBBS tells you to type in text and
terminate it with the Control-Z (^Z) character).
A typical sequence of messages could be as shown below.
SP G3ZCZ @ N4QQ
LAN-LINK
I think it is great. However, why don't you change the
following...... (add your comments here).
73 de your name
/EX
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 137
k 1234
d \net\lan-link.doc
s g8btb
Test Message
This is a test message.
\EX
lm
r 567
r 593
9.0 LAN-LINK.001 - LAN-LINK.010
These are 10 different text files with fixed names. They can be
transmitted using the Alternate function keys. Their contents can be
viewed using the Shift function keys. In all cases the function key
to use for a particular file corresponds to the number in the file
suffix. For example, use Alt/Shift Function Key 3 (Alt-F3) to
transmit/view file LAN-LINK.003. You may also use the Edit Menu to
edit and/or create the files.
In case you forget what you put in each of the files, LAN-LINK
allows you to take a peek into all of them at the same time. Use
Control Function key 1 (Control-F1) to look at the first line of all
the LAN-LINK.001 - LAN-LINK.010 files and the Brag Tape.
If the Mode File flag is set, LAN-LINK changes the files as you
change modes. You thus have 10 files in EACH mode, accessible via
the same set of control function keys. The file names are shown in
Table 9.
Table 9 LAN-LINK Mode File Names
COMMUNICATIONS MODE Mode Flag FILE NAMES
All OFF LAN-LINK.001 to LAN-LINK.010
Packet ON LAN-LINK.001 to LAN-LINK.010
AMTOR ON AMTOR.001 to AMTOR.010
BAUDOT ON BAUDOT.001 to BAUDOT.010
ASCII ON ASCII.001 to ASCII.010
CW ON MORSE.001 to MORSE.010
G-TOR ON G-TOR.001 to G-TOR.010
Pactor ON PACTOR.001 to PACTOR.010
10.0 QBU-RX.BAT
This is the command or batch file used in the :QBU: originating
station.
11.0 QBU-TX.BAT
This is the command or batch file used in the :QBU: receiving
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 138
station.
12.0 LAN-LINK.QTA
You can leave a message on your system for someone else in a file
named CALLSIGN.OUT. When the station with that callsign connects to
you, the message will be sent, and the filename will be changed from
CALLSIGN.OUT to CALLSIGN.OLD. This is fine as long as the path
between the stations good. If the path is marginal, it is possible
that your station will transmit the message and change the filename,
but the link will drop out before the message is received at the
other station. If the other station does not connect to you and
:QSM:, the message may get lost. If this situation occurs, you can
tell LAN-LINK that there is a bad path between you and that station,
and not to change the file names without an explicit :QTA:
instruction from that other station. You do this by putting the call
of the station(s) having a bad path in an ASCII file called LAN-
LINK.QTA. Put one call on each line in the form
N9BE
G8BTB
You must use the root call of the station without an SSID. that
means, if the station is N9BE-4, just put N9BE in the file.
LAN-LINK will automatically acknowledge incoming messages from
stations with callsigns in the LAN-LINK.QTA file with a ":QTA:".
13.0 QZ*.BAT
As any LAN-LINK station can either receive or originate a :QZD: and
a :QZU: command, LAN-LINK uses four batch files to control Zmodem
transfers. These files are as follows.
QZU-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZU:
QZU-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of :QZU:
QZD-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZD:
QZD-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of :QZD:
Each LAN-LINK user must configure the QZ*.BAT files for their
systems. The port number in the batch file should be set to the PC
I/O Port used. The data rate in the batch file should be set to the
data rate used between the PC and the TNC, NOT the data rate used on
the radio link.
For example, the default QZU-RX.BAT file of "pcz 1 1200 rz %1"
should be changed to "pcz 2 1200 rz %1" if you are have interfaced
your TNC to Port 2 on your PC, and if, the baud rate between the TNC
is 2400 baud, the file should be changed to "pcz 2 2400 rz %1".
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 139
Each of the four batch files have to be customized for each user
who is not using PC Port Com1 and 1200 baud between the PC and their
TNC. The INSTALL program takes care of that chore. The high level of
customization required here is because different Zmodem imple-
mentations require different sequences of instructions and LAN-LINK
does not want to limit you to a specific one.
14.0 ELMER.QSO
This is the state table (configuration file) for ELMER. The
contents of the file are as described in Appendix 8. If this file is
not present in the same sub-directory as LAN-LINK, you will not be
able to activate ELMER.
15.0 LAN-LINK.OUT
This file will be transmitted to all incoming connects (except when
in the multi user mode), if the file is present, and if the Auto
Answer flag is enabled. You can think of this file as a CTEXT File.
16.0 *.DMO
These files are demonstration or test files. When LAN-LINK is put
into the Demo Mode (LAN-LINK Menu), LAN-LINK treats the lines of
text read from these files as if they came in from the TNC via the
serial port. Use these files for demonstrations and/or tests of
different features.
17.0 *.CQ files
These files allow you to customize the CQ call in the non-packet
communications modes.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 140
Appendix 4 Local Area Network Capability
VHF Packet radio systems can be considered as part of a Local Area
Network (LAN) in which messages can be left by one station in the
computer belonging to a second station. At HF the same is true, but
the area becomes greater. The basic problem here is that people can
only send and receive messages to or from you when you are on-line.
To compensate for this, BBS stations were developed which allowed
both messages and bulletins to be stored by anyone for later
retrieval.
LAN-LINK allows you to store messages in your computer so as to use
it as an automatic answering machine. By storing the messages in a
file called by the name of callsign, with the file extension ".OUT",
anyone connecting to the computer will get their message without
having to request it. LAN-LINK also extends that concept to cover
the eventuality of you wanting to take your computer off-line for
some reason. You may now load the message into any other computer
you can connect to using elements of the Q code adapted to the High
Level Network Communications Language (NC/L) first proposed in my
book Software for Amateur Radio, (Book number 1560) published by TAB
Books, Blue Ridge Summit, Pa. 17214 U.S.A.
1.0 LAN Protocol (G3ZCZ Version)
The protocol is as follows. When connected to someone who has their
LAN-LINK configured as a host, if you want to store a message on
that system, you use "QSP". You send the other station ":QSP:
CALLSIGN" where "CALLSIGN" is the callsign of the station that the
message is for, not the callsign of the host station in whose
computer you are storing the message. [Note use only one space
character after the :QSP:].
For example if you want to store a message for 4Z4ZB in 4X6AA's
computer which is configured as a LAN-LINK Store and Forward system,
you would first connect to 4X6AA and then send the command as ":QSP:
4Z4ZB". Better still use :QSP: option in the LAN-LINK Menu to
automate the sequence.
The computer at 4X6AA will respond either with a statement saying
that it is ready for you to go ahead, or send a message saying that
it can't comply. If it is ready you get a positive reply which will
take the form :QRV: CALLSIGN which if you know the Q code, means "I
am ready to accept a message for CALLSIGN".
At this time you may go ahead and send the message. If you type the
message at the keyboard, you may use either a Control-Z (^Z)
character or the character sequence ":EOF:" followed by a carriage
return (the "Enter" key) to terminate the message. If you have first
written the message into a text file you may then send it using the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 141
"Send File" option of the Files Menu and the termination sequence is
automatic.
Once you have completed the message, the other (host) computer will
either reply that the message has been successfully stored or give
you an error message.
If the message is stored and ready to be sent next time the
addressee connects to that computer, you will see the message :QSL:
on your screen. If something went wrong, you will get back a
negative message taking the form :QNO: followed by a number. The
number tells you why the operation failed.
2.0 Message Format
The message is stored just as if you had left it in your system
(except that a header is added identifying the time of reception and
the call of the sending station). It will contain a header showing
the date and time it was received and your callsign. Should a
message for that station already be in the system, yours will be
appended to it. In the event your upload is aborted, the amount of
text received before the abort occurred will be stored as the
message.
When you disconnect from the other LAN-LINK host station, its mail
beacon will be updated.
Once the message is loaded in the host, it can only be deleted by
the operator of the host station. When the addressee connects to the
host and receives the message, the file type will change from ".OUT"
to ".OLD". Note QTA stations require positive confirmation of
receipt of message for the renaming to take place.
3.0 ASCII File Uploading/Downloading
There comes a time when you want to leave a file on your system for
someone to download later. You can do this by using NC/L to control
the transfer. You must leave the file in the file download sub-
directory defined in the LAN-LINK.SYS FILE (default value is C:\LAN-
LINK\FILES). You must first create the sub-directory, if it does not
exist. The station who wants the message then asks for it using
:QBM: FILENAME.TYP. They do not need to use the full sub-directory
path. They must, however, leave a single space character between
:QBM: and the filename. In AMTOR the Mailbox must be turned on for
remote functions.
For example, you have the latest ARRL DX bulletin, and you want to
pass it on. You could pass it to selected people by copying the file
to individual messages with the filetype ".OUT", e.g. 4X6AA.OUT,
4Z4ZB.OUT or even G3ZCZ.OUT if you want me to get it, which wastes a
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 142
lot of disk space.
On the other hand you could tell people that the file was available
for downloading, either in the CTEXT connect message line which
everyone gets when connecting to you by configuring LAN-LINK
accordingly, or in individual (".OUT") messages.
If you include the following line in your CTEXT message
"ARRLDX.015 now available"
people will know that to download it, they just have to type the
line ":QBM: ARRLDX.015" (one space character between :QBM: and the
file name) to get the file. LAN-LINK is not designed as a BBS,
however, if you copy the contents of the \LAN-LINK\FILES sub-
directory into a file called DIR (USE DIR > DIR in DOS), anyone can
get a list of the files you have stored in it for downloading by
typing :QBM: DIR. Since they do not get the real directory, just
what was in it at the time you copied it into the file "DIR", you
may keep "hidden" files in this sub-directory. You may thus leave a
file for someone to download, tell them that its there by leaving
them a message (which they will get automatically when they connect)
and no one else connecting will know that it is there.
If you want to upload a file, ":QDB:" allows you to upload text or
ASCII files.
If you use the "lan-linK" option of the Packet Terminal Menu, LAN-
LINK will automate the QDB and QBM features for you.
4.0 Path Determination to a DX station
If you want to establish a digipeat path to a station somewhat out
of your direct range, you need to know which of the stations that
you can connect to can hear that desired DX station. If you could
get a call monitored (MH list) from the stations that you connect
to, you would be able to see if the station you are connected to has
heard your desired DX station.
LAN-LINK uses the :QMH: command to request such a list. When LAN-
LINK receives a :QMH: command, it drops back to the TNC Command Mode
and issues a "MH" command to the TNC (except to a TNC1 which does
not support it). It stores the list received in a temporary buffer,
and then returns to the Converse Mode and transmits the list back to
the station it is linked to.
By judicious use of :QMH: you can determine paths to other
stations. Note however, that just because one station can hear
another station, it does not mean that it can work it. For example,
the station you are connected to may be using a power level of 1
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 143
watt or so, while the station 200 miles away that it heard was using
100 watts. Test the path yourself, or/and leave a message asking how
reliable the connect path between those two stations is.
If you and a small group use a non standard packet channel for
inter-group communications, you may also use the :QMH: function to
find out who the station you are connected with, has heard recently,
when you first sign on the LAN channel.
5.0 Binary File Transfers
In the PC world most binary file transfers seem to be taking place
using the YAPP protocol built into the YAPP user terminal program
and the BBS software written by Jeff Jacobsen, WA7MBL. As Jeff
stated in the documentation, YAPP was written to provide a terminal
program for use in testing the WA7MBL BBS code. However for many
radio amateurs, YAPP was their first terminal program.
The YAPP binary transfer protocol is similar to the Xmodem protocol
used on telephone line BBSs. In order to transmit a file, the
sending station breaks the file down into blocks of characters. Each
block is transmitted in sequence. After a block has been
transmitted, the sending station waits for the receiving station to
acknowledge that block and verify that it was received without
errors.
When two stations are alone on a frequency, they can transfer data
quite quickly. So back in 1986 when YAPP was written, it provided
the few hams using packet radio with a binary file transfer
capability. Today, however, the situation is different. In most
urban areas, each packet radio channel is occupied by many stations,
and the requirements for binary file transfers are somewhat
different.
6.0 Requirements for Transfer Protocols
The AX.25 protocol provides for a basic verification that packets
have been received error free. If the binary file transfer protocol
could establish the connection, start sending blocks, and then keep
sending data until one of three things happen; the link drops out,
the receiving station signals that some of the data were received
with errors, or the whole file is transmitted correctly.
If the whole file is transmitted, then the sending station just has
to wait for an acknowledgment from the receiving station that the
file was received. If the circuit is busy with several stations on
the channel, or the path goes through one or more Nodes, there will
be varying delays in the delivery time of the packets. By not having
to acknowledge each block of data, the file can get through much
faster than it would have, in the case in which each received block
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 144
has to be individually acknowledged.
If the link drops out, it would be nice if the computers, could
determine how much of the file was received, then pick up the
transmission at that point next time they link up.
If the receiving station signals that some data were received in
error, the sending station should then begin to retransmit from the
start of the error.
7.0 The Zmodem Protocol
This situation is not unique to the amateur radio packet network.
It is also present in the commercial packet switching environment,
and the Zmodem protocol was developed to provide the capabilities
described above. Zmodem thus seems to be an almost ideal binary file
transfer protocol for use on radio amateur packet channels, and is
incorporated in LAN-LINK 2.00.
LAN-LINK uses the :QZD: and :QZU: commands to provide the
capability to remotely download and upload binary files. :QZD:
allows you to download a file from another station, while :QZU:
allows you to upload a binary file. :QZD: is configured so that if
the link drops outs during the transfer, when the connection is once
again established, a subsequent :QZD: for the same filename, will
cause the transfer to pick up where it left off when the link
dropped out. This feature is not allowed in the upload :QZU: command
to inhibit people from injuring files that already exist on the
other computer. Each command may be initiated from either end of the
link, but to gain the most from the recovery capability, files
should be downloaded by the receiving station.
8.0 The PCZ Zmodem Package
LAN-LINK implements the Zmodem protocols using batch files in DOS
that call up external programs. This approach allows stations to try
different versions of Zmodem and experiment to find the optimal one
for their area. LAN-LINK comes with the (PCZ) Public Domain
implementation of the Zmodem, Ymodem, Xmodem, Xmodem-1K and Sealink
protocols by Drue Kennon and Gary Smith.
Since any LAN-LINK station can either receive or originate a :QZD:
and a :QZU: command, LAN-LINK comes with four default batch files to
control Zmodem transfers. These files are as follows.
QZU-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZU:
QZU-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of :QZU:
QZD-RX.BAT Batch file implemented after receipt of :QZD:
QZD-TX.BAT Batch file implemented after transmission of :QZD:
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 145
Each pair of users can experiment with other protocols and Zmodem
implementations using the :QZD: and :QZU: commands after reading the
PCZ documentation. The :QBU: command can also be used if the
corresponding DOS batch files (QBU-RX.BAT and QBU-TX.BAT) are
created.
LAN-LINK contains an output buffer to store data being output to
the TNC. The TNC contains a buffer which stores data about to be
sent on the radio link. In the normal course of events, the two
buffers fill up, so that the Zmodem package used by LAN-LINK may
think that all the data has been transmitted, when in fact there are
still characters left in the buffers, or the last packet has not yet
made it to the destination station. In this case, you may see a
message on your screen that the system has sent all the data and is
waiting for the final acknowledgment, while at the same time you can
see from the LEDs on the TNC that you still have outgoing data in
your system. Have patience and wait a while to let the two systems
synchronize.
In the event that the link is bad and errors occur, this buffering
may cause problems which require some of the Zmodem timing
parameters to be changed. Should this situation arise, read the
Zmodem package documentation.
The flexibility offered by the Zmodem protocol has many advantages
when used in a packet radio network. LAN-LINK 2.00 implements Zmodem
by the use of an external public domain protocol package which
provides for the maximum degree of user customization. This
capability is provided at the cost of having the individual user
customize four batch files using the text editor built into LAN-
LINK.
9.0 BASIC NC/L DICTIONARY
Messages can be transferred into any other LAN-LINK computer you
can connect with using elements of the Q code adapted for the
purpose. NC/L command words are summarized in the following
paragraphs. There is no command word to request your message. To
receive your message, you do nothing. You will receive your mail
automatically when connecting/linking with a LAN-LINK station. You
cannot normally read messages addressed to another person.
9.1 :QBM:
To download an ASCII file, send ":QBM: file name.type". The
filename.type is the file you want. i.e. ":QBM: DIR".
9.2 :QDB:
To upload ASCII files to another LAN-LINK system send ":QDB:
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 146
filename.type". Files will be uploaded into the same sub-directory
as LAN-LINK, and will have a message header inserted at the top of
the file to allow the operator to know who uploaded the file. If the
operator then wants to make the file available for downloading, he
or she can move it to the \LAN- LINK\FILES sub-directory. The ".TYP"
following the filename is optional. If you attempt to upload a file
which has the same name as one that already exists on the remote
system, you will receive an "error" message. This command is the
reverse of :QBM:.
9.3 :QMH:
To request a call monitored list ("MH") from the LAN-LINK station
that you are connected with, send ":QMH:".
9.4 :QSM:
To request a repeat of a message from a station using LAN- LINK,
send ":QSM:". This command will be valid as long as the host station
has not deleted the YOURCALL.OLD file on his disk. If the file does
not exist, you will receive a :QNO: "error" response.
9.5 :QSP:
To leave a message, send ":QSP: callsign". The callsign is that of
the station for whom you wish to leave a message.
9.6 :QRA:
When disconnected, to see what stations (using LAN-LINK 1.53+) are
on the LAN, or which LAN-LINK stations have messages pending, send
":QRA:". All LAN-LINK stations will reply with a mail beacon within
a few seconds. The Alt-W key implements this feature.
9.7 :QRT:
To shut down a LAN-LINK AMTOR/Packet mode Mailbox or beacon station
which is causing QRM, link or connect to the station and send
":QRT:".
9.8 :QRU:
To upload messages from one LAN-LINK/PK232COM (1.38+) system to
your computer, send ":QRU:".
You may only use the QRU function with stations designated as Store
and Forward mailboxes. Put a list of stations that you can connect
to reliably in your CALLSIGN.MBX file and send it to other stations
in your LAN also using LAN-LINK. They will then be able to dump
their mail messages on you and you on them. If they do the same and
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 147
send you their file, then you will be able to send messages via them
for stations that they can work.
While QRU gives you the capability to bulk upload messages to
another station in your local area, when you take your machine off
line, it may also be used to transfer messages between two LANs via
well sighted gateway digipeaters.
9.9 :QNO:
:QNO: and error message text is a response to a request.
9.10 :QJG:
:QJG: is a response to :QRU:. It confirms that the QRU sequence is
complete. There are no more messages pending.
9.11 :QRV:
:QRV: callsign is a response to :QSP: callsign. The computer is
ready to send the message. End the message with a control Z (^Z)
character, or the sequence :EOF:
9.12 :QSL:
:QSL: is a response to a command. It confirms receipt of message to
that callsign or that a file has been successfully uploaded and
stored to disk. It is also used to acknowledge receipt of a ":QRT:"
command.
9.13 :QTA:
If LAN-LINK receives :QTA: and a message exists for the connecting
station, LAN-LINK will change the filetype from "OUT" to "OLD" and
respond with a "QSL". If a message does not exist, it will respond
with a "QNO".
9.14 :QTC:
If LAN-LINK receives :QTC: it will respond with the beacon text
showing the mail queue. :QTC: precedes a list of callsigns for whom
messages are stored up on a computer. It is used in Packet Beacon
transmissions or AMTOR Beacon mode CQ calls.
9.15 :QBU:
This feature is supplied to allow experimentation with external
protocols.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 148
9.16 :QZU:
:QZU: is used to implement an upload of a binary file from another
station using an external Zmodem protocol via the QZ*.BAT files.
9.17 :QZD:
:QZD: is used to implement a remote download of a binary file from
another station using an external Zmodem protocol via the QZ*.BAT
files. In the event that the link drops out during the transmission,
when the link is remade, and the :QZD: retried, the transfer will
pick up from the point at which it was interrupted, if the batch
files provided are used.
9.18 :QIC:
Use :QIC: to page the operator at any LAN-LINK 2.10+ station. The
sequence is:- you send :QIC: to another LAN-LINK 2.10 station. Use
the LAN-LINK Menu or type it by hand. Upon receipt, LAN-LINK begins
to page the operator if the sound flag is on. At that time it sends
you a :QRX: followed by a number, i.e. ':QRX: 30'. The number is the
number of seconds it will page the operator. At the end of the
paging sequence it will send the prompt i.e. 'G3ZCZ>'. If the sound
is inhibited it will send ':QRX: QRT' to signal that it is in a
silent configuration.
9.19 :QTR:
The :QTR: command allows you to get the date-time-text string from
the other LAN-LINK 2.10+ station. Don't confuse it with :QRT:.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 149
Appendix 5 Using Different TNCs
The Packet Mode capabilities can be used on all TNCs. There are
minor differences in the command dialogue between different TNCs.
The dialogue differences affecting the operation of LAN-LINK are
built into the program and set when the TNC type is read from the
LAN-LINK.SYS file at the program load time. The non packet modes
will obviously result in error messages if attempted on a packet
mode only TNC.
The following notes apply to different TNCs or digital
communications controllers.
1.0 TNC2 (MFJ 1270)
The following functions do not work because the TNC does not
support them.
All NON PACKET modes.
Software controlled HF/VHF switching.
Software controlled baudrate switching.
CQ/BEACON Packet terminal mode.
TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
N2GNJ noticed that he needed "LC ON" when using a Tiny 2 EPROM
Version 2.0 in the MFJ 1270B to make the automatic snatch features
work.
2.0 TNC1 (HK-4040)
The Packet Communications Mode header colors are not supported in
LAN-LINK for this TNC. The following functions do not work because
the TNC does not support them.
All NON PACKET modes.
Day/Time functions.
MH and remote :QMH: functions.
MAIL Packet Terminal Mode.
CQ/BEACON Packet Terminal Mode.
TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
Conference and multiconnect modes.
3.0 Kantronics KPC-2
The Packet Communications Mode header colors are not supported in
LAN-LINK for this TNC. The following functions do not work because
the TNC does not support them.
All NON PACKET modes.
MAIL Packet Terminal Mode.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 150
CQ/BEACON Packet Terminal Mode.
TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
N0QIX suggests adding the following lines to the LAN-LINK.SYS
file.
Parity 0 4 (means 0)
DWAIT 20 2
FRACK 6 4
The new values then become the defaults.
4.0 Kantronics KAM
LAN-LINK switches colors when it sees the /V or /H following the
callsign in the packet header, or in the calls monitored ("MH")
list. If you are monitoring both HF and VHF simultaneously, the
colors will show you which radio heard the signal. If the Mail-
Snatch or the QTC-Snatch are triggered, LAN-LINK will change modes
and attempt the connect on the correct radio. Turn the DCD flag OFF
for these automatic features to work.
The following functions do not work because the TNC does not
support them.
TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
The SIGNAL Communications Mode.
The Alt-D key in the MORSE Communications Mode.
5.0 PK-232
Turn BBS OFF, if you want the Alert Call, packet communications
mode header colors, and Digipeat Detect features to work, otherwise
turn BBS ON.
6.0 MFJ 1278
LAN-LINK assumes that the Radio 1 port is connected to the VHF/UHF
packet transceiver, and the Radio 2 port is connected to the HF
transceiver with the multi mode communications capability.
Early versions of the MFJ1278 suffers from one major deficiency as
far as LAN-LINK is concerned. The Echo-As-Sent only works in the
AMTOR Communications Mode. That means that you will not see the
contents of a file echo in the incoming window as the file is being
transmitted in the RTTY mode. Later versions have changes that
either change the defaults or work differently.
The following functions do not work because either the TNC does not
support them or does not do so in a consistent manner.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 151
TNC Transmit Buffer flush.
The SIGNAL Communications Mode.
CW Identification.
Pactor Break in.
Type ahead buffer.
7.0 Heath HK-21
K3WGF noticed that his Heath HK-21 TNC didn't seem to have the
proper circuitry to support true DCD on pin 8 of the RS232
connector. Even though the pin was labeled DCD it didn't signal
properly. Set the DCD function in LAN-LINK to OFF to make the
Capture-to-Disk close out normally rather than continue to remain
engaged.
8.0 PK-88
This TNC works like a PK-232 except that it only supports packet.
9.0 PK-900 and DSP-2232
These TNCs provide access to both ports simultaneously. LAN-LINK
supports dual windows, and some of the communications modes.
Otherwise, support is as if they were PK-232s. Sometimes, LAN-LINK
may take a few characters to synchronize windows.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 152
Appendix 6 Anomalies and Bugs
This section discusses various anomalies and bugs.
1.0 Command/Converse Mode Anomalies
Since the Program has no way to check the command/converse mode
status of the TNC, you may see various "Cmd:" and other "error
messages" from the TNC when using the menus or function key
commands. Ignore them for now. If you get an error message, try
using the function key again.
2.0 Buffer Messages in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
In the AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode, if the other station drops the link
while you are recording the text, BEFORE the callsign has been
recognized as a valid callsign, LAN-LINK will time out before
logging the QSO and restart the CQ sequence. If someone else calls
in before the time-out has occurred, the text from both stations
should be captured to disk, but the log entry may not show both
stations. You should compare the callsigns in the logbook with the
"RUN" file for QSO purposes.
LAN-LINK in the Beacon/Mailbox Mode, normally logs the contact at
the end of the line in which it recognized the callsign as a valid
callsign.
3.0 FEC +? Responses in AMTOR Beacon CQ Mode
In the AMTOR Beacon CQ or Mailbox mode, if another station sends a
+? in the FEC Mode, the beacon will attempt to send the LAN-LINK.TXT
file. The PK-232 however is not in the Converse Mode at that time
and will interpret the text of the file as commands. If by some
chance, the text corresponds to a valid command the PK-232 will
execute it and put the PK-232 in an unknown state and you may not
notice that it did. As such I recommend that the first character of
each line in the file LAN-LINK.TXT be a non valid command character
such as a number or a period (.) or another punctuation sign.
4.0 Using a Monochrome Monitor
If you are using a monochrome monitor, the text you type into the
Outwindow may be fainter than the incoming text. This is because of
the default colors used. Change the colors using the Parameter Menu.
5.0 The Packet Conference Mode
The Conference Mode has been tested on a PK-232, KAM, a SANYO MBC-
675 which has a clock speed of 4.7MHz and other PC clones with
faster clock speeds. If you have problems with intermittent
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 153
selection of I/O channels try slowing down your CPU clock. There is
a software delay loop in the program that is used to allow the TNC
time to switch I/O streams after receipt of the stream change
command. This delay is there because LAN-LINK tests for a connect on
each channel before outputting any text, so that it does not send
un-addressed packets on non connected I/O channels.
6.0 Packet Conference Mode Disconnects
Any Packet conference Mode disconnect returns the TNC to the
Command Mode, even if you remain connected to other stations.
7.0 Strange Events
If the TNC does not use an interrupt driven serial port you may
experience problems when using baud rates greater than 1200. The PK-
232 DOES NOT LIKE LAN-LINK to use RS-232 baud rates faster than
2400, and sometimes not even that. Use 1200 until YOU have tested
and ARE SURE that a faster one will work.
If you have any strange problems and are using an RS-232 terminal
baud rate between the PC and the TNC which is greater than 1200, set
the Terminal Baud Rate to 1200 and see if the problem goes away.
Make sure that your configuration is set the way you think it is.
Verify it using the Parameter Menu.
You must have at least one common call or scan word in your SYS
file, or you will get errors when you update the SYS file.
8.0 *** DISCONNECTED
In the Packet Communications Mode, when you are connected to
someone and the TNC sends "*** DISCONNECTED" to the computer, LAN-
LINK thinks you have been disconnected and resets. This normally
only happens when a true disconnect occurs. However, if the text
shows up in the middle of a line being sent to you, it will have the
same effect. LAN-LINK will think that you have disconnected if the
DCD Flag is not set in the SYS file, and the TNC does not use the
DCD signal on pin 8 of the RS-232 interface.
9.0 *** CONNECTED
In the Packet Communications Mode, if you are monitoring traffic on
the LAN and someone sends a packet containing "*** CONNECTED", LAN-
LINK thinks you have been connected, if the DCD-Flag is not set, and
the TNC does not use the DCD signal on pin 8 of the RS-232
interface.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 154
10.0 Greek Characters and Other Garbage in the Incoming Screen
If you see Greek characters in the Incoming screen you probably
have the wrong parity set in the TNC. First make sure that the RS-
232 baud rate is correct. If it is, take the batteries out of it and
reset it. If that fails, play with the parity. LAN-LINK sets the
serial port as configured in the TNC.SYS file for each TNC. For
example, for the PK-232 it is 8 bits, no parity. For the TNC2, it is
7 bits. If you still can't get LAN-LINK to talk to the TNC, set the
interface to 7 bits in the configuration file.
11.0 Dumb TNC
If the TNC seems to respond to commands but is not sending anything
back, you may have one of two problems. You may have a bad RS-232
cable with a wire disconnected. If the computer can operate the TNC
in another communications program, try to reset the TNC, take the
batteries out, etc. You may also have a not-so-compatible PC.
12.0 Intermittent Lockup
Watch out for flow control problems on the cable between the TNC
and the PC and between the PC and the Display.
Versions of LAN.LINK up to and including 1.55 used software
handshaking. Anytime the program received a Control-S (^S) character
from the TNC it waited until it subsequently received a Control-Q
(^Q). These characters can appear on the LAN in a binary packet,
either when binary file transfers are in progress, or in a Inter
NET/ROM message. To avoid this lockup, a line containing "MFILTER
19" was added in the LAN-LINK.SYS file for the PK-232 to make the
TNC filter the ^S character out and not pass it to LAN.LINK. LAN-
LINK 1.56 and onward use hardware handshaking so this problem should
not appear. However if the FLOW and XFLOW parameters are not set to
OFF in your TNC, LAN- LINK can appear to lockup. Make sure that they
are both set OFF in your TNC.
13.0 Automatic Functions Don't Work
This usually happens with the KAM. Set the DCD Flag off, and the
automatic functions should work. Note that in this case the multi-
connect functions will not work.
14.0 BBS Zap Failure
If the BBS Zap hangs up in the middle of sending a message, the
probability is that the LAN-LINK is waiting for the PBBS to send it
a word it recognizes. You have probably not configured the "PBBS
Read Subject" and "PBBS Message" Strings (lines 43 and 44) in the
LAN-LINK.SYS File (See Appendix 2, Section 18.18). If you are using
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 155
a KAM, read the previous section.
15.0 LAN-LINK Forgets the Band/Power Information
LAN-LINK picks up the band and power information from the logbook.
You can set them via the "0" option in the Parameters Menu. If the
logbook is empty, LAN-LINK will not remember the settings when it is
switched off. Put at least one entry in each logbook.
16.0 Zmodem Binary Transfer Problems
Some stations perform binary transfers with no problems, others
seem to have problems. If you are having problems with the binary
file transfers make sure:
You have enough memory left over after loading LAN-LINK to run
the external communications protocol.
The TNC is set for 8 bit transfers.
Both stations are using the same data rate between the PC and
the TNC.
The TNC does not filter any characters out of the data stream,
i.e. MFILTER or the equivalent parameter in your TNC is not
set.
You try the binary transfers via the LAN-LINK menu.
You read the PCZ Documentation file and set the Environmental
variables correctly.
If all else fails, try a different external protocol.
17.0 LAN-LINK 2.32 Snatch problem
In LAN-LINK 2.32 the QTC and BBS snatches only seem to work if
there is a SSID on the end of the call. For example, you have a
message for G3ZCZ on your system in the file G3ZCZ.OUT. If G3ZCZ
connects, he does not get the message. However, if G3ZCZ-4 connects,
he does. This bug should now be fixed.
18.0 Double colon after QTC
These are created by the program and show the user is not
registered (i.e. "LAN-LINK 2.32 :QTC::"). Registered versions
transmit single colon characters (i.e. "LAN-LINK 2.34 :QTC:").
19.0 Logbook 601 errors
These (and similar) errors in the log package mean the log is not
indexed. Bring up the logbook, then BEFORE you do anything else Re-
index the log. Exit from the logbook, change to hf mode and bring up
the logbook. Again re-index the hf log before you do anything else.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 156
20.0 KAM HF Packet Problem
Change line 53 in the LAN-LINK.SYS file from a | to a ~. Read
about the "STReamsw" command in the Kantronics manual. STREAMSW
should be $7E/$7C (~/|).
21.0 ASCII ANSI color transfers
LAN-LINK sends these files (packet and pactor) as text files, with
a maximum number of characters on a line of 255. check the TNC line
length parameter. They default to 80. If that fails to cure the
problem, well several popular programs which create ANSI color files
seem to generate longer lines. Sorry for the incomparability.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 157
Appendix 7 Updates, Revision History
If you are updating from a previous version of LAN-LINK, the
following changes were made in recent versions of LAN-LINK.
2.00 ELMER, Alt-W, word wrap, G option in Edit menu, Strswitch chars
& error_st in sys file, added. KAM cw/cmd bug fixed, AMTOR sets
narrow shift, connect timeout configurable, KAM RX/TX inv added,
bell filtered out of connectee/log call, KAM cw and other parameter
changes, log power/band picked up from log, custom word[20] in
prompt, Elmer added, event timer 2/6 reset change, MH fire delay for
KAM, ^T filtered out in all tncs, #T in contest text, NAVTEX and
navy MARS enabled for KAM/MFJ1278, flag_XMITOK added, base count
added to SYS file, CTEXT saved.
2.10 PACTOR (KAM, PK-232) added. Converted to TP6, Bug fixes Init:
7/8bits, log package changed, Elmer.QSO loaded at start-up, Elmer
RUN command, BBS custom commands, Flag_Inhibit_Logging, Logging
package, FLAG_Printer_Perm, TNC_parameter, mode at start up, QIC,
QMH in menu, QTR, LAN-LINK.OUT, ANSI Colors, PacketCluster Log
Search mode added. ELMER resets on disconnect, MFJ1278 radio port
customizable, Shut down flag 5 deleted, BBS upload states changed.
2.20 Added: PACTOR (MFJ1278), Scan Word and PacketCluster DX alert
colors. Converted to TP7. Bug fixes: Common call loading, KAM HF
packet color, Shut down state 4, capture-to-disk, update LAN-
LINK.SYS file. 2.20B fixed 'menu move' bug.
2.30 Support for PK-900 and DSP 2232. Better ANSI support. G-TOR in
KAM. Manual Mode, Z and B options added to BBS Menu. Expanded
PacketCluster support. Demo option added in LAN-LINK Menu. Radio
Menu added for Kenwood and Icom (untested). EDIT.EXE and UPGRADE.EXE
external programs added. Sound effects on "Busy" packet response.
2.32 QTC and BBS snatch bugs fixed.
2.34 CQ file and PacketCluster simulation added. Dual port TNC (PK-
900 and DSP-2232) manual mode shows one IN window. Auto window
select. BBS menu cleaned up. A, L and T in options added in BBS
menu. Bus fixed: AMTOR robot connect now stays in converse. Space
deleted in fromutome (fk3), shut down state of 5. Log menu, purge
and sort on date+time. Zap BBS/QTC snatch bug fixed. QSL menu added.
LAN-LINK menu 'C' window switch. Call menu 'F'.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 158
Appendix 8 ELMER: An Expert System Based on a Finite State
Machine
There are two versions of ELMER supplied with LAN-LINK. One is
built in for use in packet mode communications, when connected to
someone else. The second version is a stand alone version for use in
developing the text files and the logic. The stand alone version
lets you program and debug your own personal ELMER on your own. The
stand alone version is a separate product and requires separate
registration.
Most initial amateur radio contacts (QSO) are somewhat repetitive,
in that they send the same information each time. In digital mode
communications hams don't type exactly the same information in every
QSO, but in general the information exchanged is a subset of a
standard set. Hams have noticed this phenomenon and have each
created and used files containing standard information. This fact
was noticed years ago, and the first so called "brag tapes" were
invented to serve that need back when they were using
teletypewriters and generated paper tapes for the standard informa-
tion.
ELMER takes that concept a little further and provides expert
system. By parsing the incoming text, ELMER will recognize certain
words and transmit text files containing replies or further
questions, just as if the operator was at the keyboard.
Hams can use this feature to build a smart server they can put on-
line on the LAN. The server will prompt people and will serve an
educational purpose. ELMER can be set up to teach people about
packet radio, license upgrades, or anything else. ELMER can also be
programmed to recognize different languages and hold a conversation
in those languages. In fact, apart from the dedicated educational
and informational server applications, ELMER may be configured with
such a variety of vocabulary files so as to pass the Turing test in
most typical amateur radio digital mode conversations.
1.0 INTRODUCTION
ELMER is a program which allows you to build an expert system. It
uses the ELMER.QSO file to set up the state machine.
The ELMER contains an array of words to be matched, current states,
next states, and files to be loaded.
The ELMER starts up in an initial state. When a line of text is
received, it begins to match an array of words against the incoming
line of text. It starts matching the words in the order that they
are present in the array. It only matches words that are enabled for
the current state or for state 0. If it finds a match, it advances
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 159
the next state, and if a valid file name is present (and exists),
will output that file. The ELMER will then continue scanning the
line of text from the point that the last match was obtained. At the
end of the line, it waits for the next line.
1.1 Expert Systems
Before discussing ELMER, here's some information about expert
systems. An expert system contains knowledge about a particular
field to assist human experts or provide information to people who
do not have access to an expert in the particular field. It is an
information system that can pose and answer questions relating to
information borrowed from human experts and stored in the system's
knowledge base. Although they vary in design, most expert systems
have a user interface, a knowledge base, and an inference engine.
1.2 The User Interface
The User Interface to the expert system is the way that the user
interacts with the system to extract information from the system.
1.3 The Knowledge Base
The Knowledge Base of an expert system contains both declarative
and procedural knowledge. The facts describing the situations,
events and objects are called declarative knowledge. Procedural
knowledge is the information about courses of action and the rules
governing the actions. There are various kinds of rules that may be
employed.
1.4 The Inference Engine
The Inference Engine controls how and when the information in the
knowledge base is applied. It determines how the rules in the
knowledge base are to be applied to the problem.
1.5 Features of an Expert System
The following list of features are desirable in any expert system.
1.5.1 Useful The system should meet a specific need.
1.5.2 Usable The system should function so that even a novice
computer user finds it simple to use. It should be able to respond
to simple questions.
1.5.3 Educational The system should allow non experts to increase
their expertise. In a similar vein, the system should be able to
explain the reasoning behind its advice to allow the user to
determine the validity of the advice.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 160
1.5.4 Adaptable The system should be able to learn new knowledge.
1.6 Using an Expert System
Expert systems take the form of software packages residing on a
hardware platform (computer). The most common use of an expert
system is via a man-machine dialogue. The user types something at
the keyboard and the system replies. The user interface accepts the
input. The input is parsed in some manner. The inference and knowl-
edge engines process the user input in a predetermined manner and an
output appears. The parsing function may be a simple pattern
matching method commonly called keyword analysis, or a more
complicated function using syntactic analysis. Keyword analysis is a
logical function in which the presence of various keywords are
detected. When a keyword is found, the system responds in the manner
in which it has been programmed. For example, if the system detects
the words "the wx" in a question, it may respond with " the wx here
is sunny".
In syntactic analysis, a sentence is analyzed according rules which
allow the system to respond differently to keywords which appear in
different sequences. For example, the system may respond differently
to the question "what is the wx" and "the wx" if it recognizes those
words in a sentence.
1.7 The Semantic Network
The most general and oldest artificial intelligence scheme for
representing knowledge is the semantic network. A semantic network
is a collection of objects called nodes. The nodes are connected
together by links. Ordinarily, both the links and the nodes are
labeled. A drawing of a semantic network contains bubbles to
represent the nodes, and lines connecting the nodes to represent the
links. Both nodes and links are labeled. The drawing looks just like
a PERT or CP/M chart. It is also the drawing used to represent a
state machine.
1.8 A State Machine
A state machine is a system that exists in several states. The
system makes a transition from one state to another as a result of a
stimulus. All states and transitions are defined at the time the
system is designed. The links in the semantic network are the
transitions in the state diagram.
1.9 The User Perception
The user perception of an expert system is as follows. The system
appears to be in a rest state waiting for user input. It then
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 161
receives an input from the user and enters a transition to a state
in which it processes the data it has just received. After process-
ing the input, it generates an output and returns to what seems to
be the same rest state. In reality, the two rest states (initial and
final) are different.
The logic for the detection of words in sequence is set up by the
state numbers, i.e., when the system detects the word "what", it
advances from State 0 to State 1. In State 1 it looks for either the
word "systems" or the word "englishman" which takes it to State 2,
or to State 4. All other words are ignored.
1.10 ELMER
ELMER is an expert system for amateur radio. ELMER is based on a
finite state machine using table driven software. The declarative
knowledge is stored in the form of separate ASCII text and command
files. The procedural knowledge is stored in the state table. The
Data files in ELMER correspond to the Knowledge Engine (and the
Inference Engine). The State Tables correspond to the Inference
Engine. ELMER also contains an ASCII editor for text files, and a
tool to view the state table. These tools allow the user to "teach"
ELMER new knowledge.
1.11 Responses to an Input
ELMER has three kinds of reaction to a word match. It can do
nothing, output a test file, run a command or overlay a new state
table. ELMER's state table contains four entries:-
1.11.1 Current State This is the state that the string match is
performed in. ELMER can have up to 63 different states.
1.11.2 Next State This is the state that the ELMER will advance to
if a string match is found.
1.11.3 Repeat Flag This is a flag to allow or disallow repeats. If
it is a 0 repeats are allowed. If it is a 1, they are not.
1.11.4 Command Flag This is a flag to tell the ELMER how to treat
the file. If it is a 0, load a text file; a 2, overlay the current
state table with the defined one.
1.11.5 Keyword This is the text string to match in the syntactic
analysis of the input text. The text string can be up to 15
characters long and can include spaces. The match is case
insensitive, i.e. there is no difference between upper and lower
case.
1.11.6 Data File This is a text file to be loaded or a new
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 162
configuration file.
1.12 Syntactic Analysis
ELMER performs syntactic analysis on the input text in the manner
described below. ELMER performs a string match on the line of
received text against each keyword entry in the state table. ELMER
starts with the first entry. If a match is made, ELMER changes state
and performs the transient function defined by the Command Flag. All
words in the input text including the keyword are then deleted.
ELMER then continues the string match until either the input line of
text has been reduced to zero length, or, the line of input text has
been tested against all keywords in the state table.
1.13 Programming ELMER
Programming ELMER is simple. The knowledge base is broken out in
terms of states and transitions. States can be passive or active. A
passive state is one in which ELMER does nothing other than
accept/parse further input. An active state is one in which ELMER
loads and displays a text file containing information or shells to
DOS and runs an external program.
ELMER contains a set of tools for programming and debugging
purposes. A state table for the procedural knowledge is drawn up
using pencil and paper and a large sheet of graph paper. The built
in text editor is then used to enter information into the table. The
individual text files containing the knowledge are also created
using the editor. The state table viewing tool is used to check the
entries. The state table loading capability is used to exercise
ELMER and verify the logic. Because the procedural knowledge is
contained in the state table, all sorts of rules and linkages may be
used.
2.0 The State Table (ELMER.QSO) File
These are the contents of the ELMER.QSO file.
2.1 The Directory Path to the ELMER Text Files
This item is the directory path to the sub-directory containing the
ELMER text files. For example "c:\LAN-LINK\ELMER\" or "c:\ELMER\" or
just "c:", if you put them in the same sub-directory as ELMER.EXE.
If you do use a path you MUST have the last "\" character at the end
of the sub-directory name because the program concatenates the
directory path to the ELMER.
2.2 The Start Up File
This line is not used in LAN-LINK's ELMER. It is only used in the
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 163
stand alone version. It contains the name of the text file to output
the first time ELMER is invoked (if present);
2.3 Window Colors
These seven lines are only used in the stand alone version. They
are the numbers which correspond to the colors of the seven
different windows displayed on the screen of the stand alone
version, in the following order.
2.3.1 Status Window Color
The color of the window at the top of the screen.
2.3.2 OutWindow Color
The color of the window in which the replies are displayed.
2.3.3 InWindow Color
The color of the window in which your keystrokes are displayed.
2.3.4 BottomWindow Color
The color of the bottom line of the screen.
2.3.5 Promptwindow Color
The color of the window in which menus are displayed.
2.3.6 Option Color
The color of the highlighted characters in the menus and prompts.
2.3.7 Alarmwindow Color
The color of the window in which error and alarm messages are dis-
played.
2.4 The ELMER Initial State
This item is included to allow you to have different state
machines, each starting with a different state number.
2.5 State Machine Parameters
The next few lines contain the state machine parameters.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 164
2.5.1 Current State
This is the state the string match is performed in. LAN-LINK allows
up to 63.
2.5.2 Next State
This is the state that the ELMER will advance to if a string match
is found.
2.5.3 Repeat Flag
This is a flag to allow or disallow repeats. "0" means that repeats
are allowed. "1" means they are not.
2.5.4 Command Flag
This is a flag to tell the ELMER how to treat the file as shown
below.
FlagOperation0 Load/display a text file. 1 Execute a BAT, COM, or
EXE file.2 Overlay the current state table with the new one.
2.5.5 Keyword
This is the text string to match. It can be up to 15 characters
long and can include spaces. The match is case insensitive, i.e.
there is no difference between upper and lower case.
2.5.6 Data File
This is either a text file to be loaded or a command file to be
executed, depending on the state of the Command File Flag. An "*"
character defines a "do nothing" state in which the Data File is
ignored.
The two character sequence "#1" will cause ELMER to clear the
screen before displaying the rest of the text in the data file.
2.6 The State Machine File
An example of some state machine parameters is shown in this
typical extract from an ELMER.QSO file.
1, 2,0,0,what,*
2, 3,0,0,englishman,*
3, 4,0,0,doing,*
4, 1,0,0,country,me-usa.txt
1, 1,1,0,equipment,pk232com.txt
1, 1,0,0,wx,localwx.txt
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 165
1, 5,0,0,kenwood,kenwood.txt
5, 1,0,0,811,811.txt
1, 1,0,0,hello,hello.txt
0, 1,0,0,name,joe.txt
A "*" character defines a "do nothing" state in which the Data File
is ignored.
2.7 Example of Programming the State Table
Consider a typical question that I get asked.
"What's an englishman like you doing in this country ?"
followed by the phrase
"The equipment here is ....."
Assuming that the ELMER is in State 1, and that the first few lines
in the ELMER.QSO file are as shown above. The ELMER recognizes the
word "what" and advances to State 2. Since the file name is an "*"
character no file is sent. The ELMER then recognizes the word
"englishman" and advances to state 3. The ELMER machine then
recognizes the word "doing" and advances to State 4. The ELMER then
recognizes the word "country" advances to State 1 and transmits the
text file "me-usa.txt", because the Command Flag is a 0. It then
recognizes the word "equipment", remains in State 1 and transmits my
brag tape file called pk232com.txt. Since the Repeat Flag is a 1,
the ELMER will not retransmit pk232com.txt should it once again
recognize the word equipment while in State 1.
Since the ELMER scans sections of the line, the same effect will be
achieved if the incoming text had looked like :-
"what's an englishman like you doing in this country ?
The equipment here is ....."
You can only have 63 lines in any one state machine array. You can
define up to 64,000 different states. Each state must be an integer.
State 0 is a wild card state. This means that any word in the array
coded for state 0 will be matched against the incoming text
whichever state the machine is in. The entries in the state machine
file must end with a line that contains state 666. For example
666, end of file
The number of lines in the array and the current state at the end
of each line scanned are shown in the status window.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 166
3.0 The Stand Alone Version Status Window
The Status Window provides you with some diagnostic information
about the state machine. The three data elements are:
The current state [C].
The number of states (lines) in the state table[T].
The file name of the current state machine table.
4.0 The Stand Alone Menu
You bring up the menu by touching the "Escape" character. You are
then presented with the options shown in Figure 8-4. To activate an
option touch the highlighted key.
Figure 8-4 ELMER Menu
E Edit Any File
L Load ELMER.QSO
P Pick File to edit
S Edit ELMER.QSO
X eXit to DOS
* Show State Table
4.1 Edit Any File
This option allows you to edit text files using the LAN-LINK
compatible text editor.
4.2 Load State Table (ELMER.QSO)
This option allows you to reload the state table, or load a
different one. If a different state table is loaded, its name will
appear in the menu.
4.3 Pick File to Edit
This option allows you to pick a file with the default filetype of
"TXT", and edit it.
4.4 Edit State Table (ELMER.QSO)
This option allows you to edit the state table (configuration)
file.
4.5 eXit to DOS
This option allows you to exit to DOS.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 167
4.6 Show State Table
This option allows you to see the contents of the state machine. It
is used in debugging the logic to ensure that the contents of the
table match what you thought you put in it.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 168
Appendix 9 PCZ Binary file Transfers
LAN-LINK uses the PCZ public domain external protocol for binary
file transfers by shelling to DOS and executing the QZ*.BAT batch
files. The QZ*.BAT files are set up for you by the INSTALL program.
This appendix contains the part of the documentation (applicable to
LAN-LINK) for PCZ as supplied by the developers of PCZ, in case you
have problems making binary file transfers work in your system. The
full text is supplied on the disk.
PCZ - A Public Domain implementation Zmodem, Ymodem, Xmodem,
Xmodem-1K, Sealink for the IBM PC family.
PCZ is a public domain Zmodem implementation that will allow users
of communication software that does not implement internal Zmodem to
access it through an external program. It is a full-featured version
of Zmodem, but does not have the large volume of bells, whistles &
options provided by Omen Tech's DSZ. However, I do believe that it
will be suitable for the average demanding BBS'r. PCZ provides
support for the basic Xmodem variants: Xmodem, Xmodem-1K, Ymodem &
SEAlink. The following is a description of how to start PCZ for file
transfers.
LEGEND
Data enclosed in "[" "]" are optional.
Data enclosed in "<" ">" are required.
Send Command line:
PCZ <1-8> <300-19200> [m] [f] [d] [s] <s?> [r] [@]<filespec>
Recv Command line:
PCZ <[1-8]> <[300-19200]> [m] [f] [k] [d] [s] <r?> [r] [filespec]
Ref:
1-8 - the number 1 - 4, -(8) << PS/2 >>
300-19200 - the number 300, 1200, 2400 etc...
m - front-end menu option (see MENU)
f - enable FOSSIL comm driver routines
k - rx keep aborted received files
d - disable video memory writes (use dos)
s - request enable Super_Z transfer mode (zmodem only)
r?,s? - transfer type sz, rz, sx, rx etc...
r - resume/recover aborted transfer (zmodem only)
@ - command file transfer alert flag (SEAlink, Z,Ymodem)
filespec - file name w/extension {complete file spec allowed}
{drive:\path\filename.ext}
Flags should be placed as shown for standardization purposes. i.e.
"f" before "d"; "d" before "k"; "rz,sz" before "r" etc... Due to the
nature of the beast, no support is provided for a default port & no
default port speed is assumed. NOTE * See environment variables
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 169
below for more on default port/speed. I personally never enter
"port" or "speed", but always enter their values. i.e. pcz 1 9600 f
sz xxxxxxx.xxx The batch files included reflect this method.
ZMODEM RECEIVE
<< SINGLE >>
PCZ 1 9600 rz myfile.ext - assume your specified file name.
<< BATCH >>
PCZ 1 2400 rz - Receive ALL sender files.
PCZ f d k rz r - Receive ALL sender files
assume PCZPORT & PCZSPEED values, use FOSSIL routines, use standard
DOS screen output, KEEP all aborted files.
RESUME any incomplete previous files.
one file mode:
PCZ 1 9600 rz INFILE.ARC - Receives one file and names INFILE.ARC
PCZ 1 9600 rz r INFILE.ARC - Recovery effort on file INFILE.ARC
NOTE * A word about command line switches might be in order here.
The switch flags " f, d, k " are global. That is they control PCZ
and not any particular protocol. The "r & s" switch is isolated
within zmodem, but is applied to both sender and receiver. If you
want PCZ's resume code enabled when sending a file then the sender
must specify "r" on the command line. Accordingly if the receiver
requests resumption of an aborted transfer, the sender must have "r"
specified or we won't resume anything. This was requested by BBS
Sysops who track download bytes, transfer points etc... Probably so
you aren't charged twice or the such like.
ZMODEM SEND
<< SINGLE >>
PCZ 1 9600 sz OUTFILE.ARC - Send one file to receiver.
<< BATCH >>
Create a TEXT command file with one complete file spec per line,
which includes drive and directory information for each file that is
not in the directory PCZ was called from.
e.g. C:\MYDIR\THISFILE.ZIP
There is NO limit to the number is allowed. Have no blank lines in
the file. Place the "@" symbol as the first character of the
filename. Pass it to PCZ on the command line as follows:
PCZ 1 2400 sz @OUTFILE.TXT
What you name the command file is your business. It simply must be
a standard ASCII file with no software or printer control codes
present.
An alternative to creating the command file for sending 2 or 3
files may be used. Simply type the file names on the dos command
line separating each one with a space.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 170
Remember the receiver must be set to accept batch uploads or you
might be spinning your wheels. Some BBS packages are just now coming
on-line with batch upload features using PCZ. They normally indicate
(BATCH) if it is supported.
XMODEM VARIANTS
To receive files using any of the Xmodem variants, the format is:
PCZ <port> <speed> rs filename - SEAlink receive
PCZ <port> <speed> rs - SEAlink Batch receive
PCZ <port> <speed> rx filename - Xmodem receive
PCZ <port> <speed> r1 filename - Xmodem-1K receive
PCZ <port> <speed> ry filename - Ymodem receive
PCZ <port> <speed> ry - Ymodem Batch receive
Remember the "k" option works for all of the receive modes. Hence
you can receive a file via SEAlink, have it abort on errors, and
then later RESUME the transfer using Zmodem.
To send files using any of the Xmodem variants, the format is:
PCZ <port> <speed> sx filename - Xmodem
PCZ <port> <speed> s1 filename - Xmodem-1K
PCZ <port> <speed> sy filename - Ymodem *
PCZ <port> <speed> ss filename - SEAlink *
* Refer to Zmodem Batch sending for batch transfers via Ymodem and
SEAlink. NOTE: The bytes and cps rate reflect the actual number of
bytes sent to, or received from the IOBuffer as a transfer
progresses. It does not necessarily reflect any specific
"BLOCKSIZE". When sending, as a transfer nears it's end, you will
see the cps decline. That's because PCZ uses buffered output vs a
simple "sector size" buffer. This will let you see actually how PCZ
is progressing in the transmission of data. In the best case "Full
Streaming Zmodem", you will see the time for actual file data; worse
case time will reflect the transmission of data headers and block
acks. It is different, but I hope everyone can appreciate a more
accurate account of what is happening inside the powerful zmodem
protocol.
** : The "Transfer Time" reflects PORT speed, (NOT MODEM) speed!
If speed conversion is being used, FORGET the transfer time.
ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
PCZ supports several environment variables which can make setting
up a comm pkg. or BBS more "user friendly". These variables are as
follows and should be placed in the autoexec.bat file as I have them
shown here or modify the setenv.bat file included to accommodate
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 171
your system.
"DRIVE" refers to the letters "A".."Z"
"YOURDIR" refers to a complete directory specification. i.e.
\COMM\ARC\
"YOUR.FIL" refers to a filename with extension that you want PCZ to
use vs it's default name.
"DIRRX" i.e. set DIRRX=drive:\yourdir\.
This variable provides the ability for all your received files to
be placed in a single location. It is very useful for bbs purposes
as well as general comm program usage. If you specify a directory
spec on the command line, it will override DIRRX. Therefore you can
easily set the variable and then just forget about it. If DIRRX
isn't set and no spec. is given on the command line, your receive
file will be created in the current active dos directory.
"PCZLOG" i.e. set PCZLOG=DRIVE:\YOURDIR\
In the log file's case, it specifies the directory you want your
PCZ.LOG file to be kept in. If "PCZLOG" is not found in the
environment then no log file is generated.
set PCZLOG=DRIVE:\YOURDIR\YOUR.FIL
As an option to the log file name "PCZ.LOG" you may specify your
own filename in the filespec. This provides greater flexibility with
some bbs packages such as RBBS which expects it's own naming
convention to be used, and for multitasking environments etc... If
your "YOUR.FIL" exist, it overrides filename "PCZ.LOG" in all cases.
"PCZPORT" i.e. set PCZPORT=(1-8)
PCZ will use the port number (1-8) as the default port.
"PCZSPEED" i.e. set PCZSPEED=(300-19200)
PCZ will use the speed (300-19200) as the default speed.
NOTE ** If you specify the PORT or SPEED on the command line, it
will override a default set by the environment variables.
"PCZDIR" i.e. set PCZDIR=DRIVE:\YOURDIR\
If you experience any problems with PCZ not being able to access
it's overlay file, setting this variable will cure the problem.
DRIVE:\YOURDIR\ should point to the directory where you have located
PCZ.EXE
IMPORTANT NOTE: NO SPACES are allowed when setting an environment
variable!
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 172
i.e. {WRONG}
set PCZLOG = C:\COMM\ will not work.
That's not my fault. It is just DOS....
i.e. {ahhhh}
set PCZLOG=C:\COMM\
"PORT & IRQ".
It has seemingly become necessary, instead of interrupt sharing,
to reassign Comm. PORT addresses and use seldom triggered IRQ lines
e.g. "5 & 7" to allow multiple "more than two" ports on one machine.
Efforts to support this trend have been successful with PCZ.
Referring back to our PCZPORT environment variable:
set PCZPORT=1
If you have reassigned your IO card addresses etc..., you can
force PCZ to comply with your wishes.
Lets say you want to use PORT 3 @ 2E8h on irq 5. You set PCZPORT
in this manner.
set PCZPORT=3,2E8,5
| | |
| | |____ IRQ line number
| |_______ PORT address
|__________ PORT number
If you specify an invalid address or one your card isn't set for,
then PCZ will simply abort during it's port validation routine. This
method should provide the support needed for those who like to match
their wits against the cpu's.
"Super_Z" (tm)
Always in search for faster from fast. Super_Z takes zmodem to the
ragged edge! If you are one of the blessed, and enjoy relatively
noise free transmission lines, you should see an increase of 2 to 3
% efficiency. XON/XOFF MUST be disabled and the modem must pass
these characters. You may activate Super_Z via the command line
switch "s". As is usually the case, Super_Z can be called by the
receiver or by the sender. That is to say, that either can flag for
Super_Z and if the remote version supports Super_Z, we're doing it.
Regarding noise, a seldom thought of fact is that just because
your local transmission lines are great to one place, someone else's
local lines may be the pits. A good example is.... When I log on to
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 173
the "Corner" from Texas on a "596" extension I rarely ever get a
line hit. When I use the "995" extensions I am prone to hits
anytime. A reverse situation might occur in your particular area. It
simply depends on the quality of any of the many exchanges you might
encounter. I can only hope you are one of the lucky ones.
NETWORK SUPPORT
PCZ has been tested completely in a network environment. It will
allow multiple users to read the same file via use of DOS's
shareable attribute. It will also lock any files that it is
currently writing to. This has been tested using Novell Netware, LAN
Manager, and CBIS Network-OS.
MENU FRONTEND
Many fine programs exist which allow protocol engines to be called
from a communications package. In an effort to make PCZ all the more
user friendly, there is now a simple menu system built into the
program. It is controlled by the file PCZ.CFG which is included in
this zip file. Take a few moments to read over it. It may be that it
is just what you are looking for in the way of a nice user
interface. The design and layout of the system is very simple and
straight forward. You control the options and protocols you wish to
have active. PCZ.CFG comments explain the various functions you can
use. To use the menu system simply call PCZ in the following manner.
PCZ m
Make your menu selections and complete the command line with your
filespecs.
PHONE SUPPORT
Phone support can be provided when you require it, if you call
while I am home. I umpire for our local women's softball league on
Mon. & Tues. nights. I play golf on Wed. & Thurs. evenings. Fri.
night I do what Maureen tells me to do! Sat. is up for grabs and
Sun. morn & evenings I am in church. Please try me sometime other
than those mentioned ...... Seriously though, any night (late) will
be fine. Just try and make it before 10p.m. CST if possible.
Note from the author:
Over the last year PCZ has received some very good reviews. More
users rely on the program for their transfers now than I thought
would ever be interested. For this I am especially grateful and
would thank each one if possible. Gary & I will continue to grow
with the needs of the BBS community. We ask for your continued input
and support, with our assurance that your IDEAS, "cheers & jeers"
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 174
are taken with sincerity. Personal contact may be made by one of the
following methods.
Drue Kennon Gary J. Smith
Rural Route #2 Box 54 6122 Cedar Wood Drive
Center, TX. 75935 Columbia, MD 21044
Voice 409-598-3809
The Programmer's Corner, Home of "PcConnect" & "PCZ"
Data/BBS: 301-596-1180 Data/BBS: 301-995-3744
Data/BBS: 301-621-4636
10 roll over lines in place with over 1.5 gigabytes of storage
space.
DSZ, ZCOMM, Professional-YAM are Copyrights of Omen Technology Inc,
all rights reserved. X00.SYS Copyright (c) by Raymond L. Gwinn, All
Rights Reserved. PCZ Copyright (c) by Drue Kennon, All Rights
Reserved. Super_Z(tm) is a trademark of PC²
The PCZ Menu Transfer System
This is the PCZ.CFG file.
;To make use of this transfer menu system PCZ should be called in
the following manner.
;PCZ m <ENTER>
;We assume in this config file that you are using SETENV.BAT to
preset your PCZ parameters for PORT and SPEED. If this isn't the
case then simply add them on the protocol lines below in their
proper place. You should be able to see from the listings the format
used here. i.e.
;SEND without the ";" begins send protocol block
;END without the ";" end the protocol block
;The protocol goes on a line followed by the ":" char followed by
PCZ's command line options for that protocol. You will be prompted
to complete the command line with your filespec(s) once the program
is started etc... pretty simple huh?
;Simple yes! but simple minded as well, and if you fail to follow
these guidelines.... who knows what type of protocol you might be
trying to use for a transfer. Just to satisfy your cats curiosity
you may uncomment the first line after SEND. Run PCZ using "m" menu
option, select upload and see what happens. No your pc won't bark
but it might barf if you select "A" as your protocol type.
;The following represent the send parameters. Using the ";" at the
beginning on a line comment out any protocol you do not wish to use
during you file transfer sessions.
SEND
;flag for beginning of send protocols
;TOSSIT: sp ;This is a curiosity test line
;XMODEM: sx
;send a file using xmodem
;X1K:s1
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 175
;send a file using xmodem 1k blocks
;YMODEM: sy
;send a file using ymodem with file header information
ZMODEM: s sz
;send a file using Super_Z zmodem
SEALINK: ss
;send a file using sealink
END
;end of send protocols
:The following represent the receive parameters.
RECEIVE
;flag for beginning of receive protocols
;XMODEM: rx
;recv a file using xmodem
;X1K:r1
;recv a file using xmodem 1k blocks
;YMODEM: ry
;recv a file using ymodem with file header information
ZMODEM: s rz
;recv a file using Super_Z zmodem
SEALINK: rs
;recv a file using sealink
END
;end of receive protocols
;You may add any of the other command line switches you wish to the
above. They are
; "f" use FOSSIL
; "d" no direct screen writes
; "k" keep all aborted downloads
;Thanks and have fun!
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 176
Appendix 10 Other PC Software by Joe Kasser, W3/G3ZCZ
1.0 PC-HAM 3.52
PC-Ham contains the following suite of programs.
1.1 LOGBOOK
Full blown logging package. With automatic check of logs for awards
such as DXCC. Allows you to recall any entry by call sign within
seconds. Indexed displays, QSL'ing, Contest mode QSL'ing (prints the
lot) and lots more. Although written in dBASE3 the package contains
a compiled version (LOGBOOK.EXE), so you don't need dBASE to run it.
The source code is ONLY given to registered users. It can convert
your exported LAN-LINK.LOG file to LAN- LINK.DBF to put this package
to work. Ideal for DX-peditions or for DX robot users to handle
QSLing and log statistics.
1.2 CONTEST
Keeps Dupes in memory, logs QSO's to disk in format which can be
processed by the LOGBOOK package. Now compiled in Turbo BASIC,
source code is supplied so that you can modify the program to meet
your requirements.
1.3 CQSS
Sweepstakes game compiled in Turbo BASIC. Work the ARRL Sweepstakes
contest on your computer. You are located just outside Washington
DC. A propagation model is built in to the program. This program is
REQUIRED training for all sweepstakes operators. Earlier version of
the program is described in detail in Software for Amateur Radio by
Joe Kasser G3ZCZ, published by TAB Books, Blue Ridge Summit, PA.
17214.
1.4 WHATSON
Predict HF Propagation for given days. Contest mode with printout
to whole world at hourly intervals. Needs BASIC.
2.0 STARTREK The Computer Program
An ideal task for the beginner to learn a language on, is a
simulation game which is written to run on a computer that the
beginner has access to. For in that case, there is complete control
of all inputs and outputs. This kind of game (in which the player
makes decisions based on the information available to him or her
available at the time), can be made sufficiently sophisticated and
complex so as to make writing it an adequate challenge for anybody.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 177
The techniques used in writing a good game are the same that
programmers use in professional activities. Writing a good game
poses a challenge that allows you to develop good habits and
techniques for programming and also allows you to learn a language
in an interesting manner. By taking an orderly approach to the game
design, complex operations may be clearly understood and converted
to computer code with the aid of a language reference manual,
irrespective of the language being used.
This product teaches the techniques for writing such a game using
the STARTREK game as an example, and the BASIC language as the
programming language in which to write the code.
Registration fees.
Single Copy $15.00
10 - 50 Copies $12.00 per registered copy.
50 - 100 Copies $10.00 per registered copy.
100 + Copies $8.00 per registered copy.
3.0 WHATS-UP 1.40
WHATS-UP is a tool for experimenting with orbital dynamics and
Telemetry Decoding and Display Program for the UoSAT-OSCAR 2, AMSAT-
OSCAR 13, Fuji-OSCAR 20, AMSAT-OSCAR 21 and the AMSAT Microsat
Spacecraft (OSCARs 16, 17, 18 and 19). It is table driven via the
configuration files to allow maximum flexibility.
WHATS-UP contains the following features:
Control Radio Memory via PC parallel port - designed for older FM
radios, you (and WHATS-UP) can step the radio memories to different
satellites if you build a simple interface circuit. Schematic
enclosed with disk: Visual and solar indication - there's a tag on
the orbit element display which indicates when a spacecraft is in
sunlight and when the spacecraft is visible for an eyeball sighting
(some, like AO-13, may need a telescope): Mission elapsed time
display - for any purpose including synchronizing to Space Shuttle
elapsed time schedule. Each spacecraft has its own indicator. Can
beacon [APRS] via, and/or automatically attempt a connect to
MIR/SAREX (better than LAN-LINK): Can automatically set Kenwood
Radios to spacecraft beacon frequency when satellite comes over your
horizon: Can automatically read the frequency from Kenwood Radios to
a disk file for Doppler frequency measurements: Can automatically
configure a PK-232 for each spacecraft data format: Reads 2 Line and
AMSAT format orbit element data files: Provides antenna azimuth and
elevation pointing data: Real time, Playback and Dumb Terminal mode:
Automatic Capture-to-disk of raw telemetry. Extracts telemetry
channel data to a database or spreadsheet readable file for further
analysis: Link quality measurement on packet telemetry: Capability
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 178
to print the raw telemetry as it is received: Up to 16 user
configurable display pages (screens): You set the position on the
page (width of engineering unit field, and number of decimal places)
that a parameter is displayed at: Wild card page (parameter shows up
on all pages): Selectable display of Engineering units or raw byte
for each display page: Display of raw packets (i.e. STATUS) Color
changes if a parameter value changed between successive frames:
Audio and visual alarms if a telemetry value exceeds, falls below or
falls outside a preset limit value(s): Dumb split screen terminal
mode (in the manner of LAN-LINK): Customizable colors, PC to TNC
baud rate, data parity and stop bits: Default spacecraft
configuration files: Time of day clock display (in HH:MM:SS format).
Real time analysis requires a receiver and demodulator. Analysis of
playback data can be performed with just the computer and WHATS-UP.
If you would like a copy of WHATS-UP and have captured any
telemetry to disk, especially daytime or southern hemisphere passes,
please put them on a disk and send it in with your request, a mailer
and return postage. Don't let the individual data files become too
long. I suggest that you rename them every day in the format
YYMMDD.SC, such as 900824.D17, 900824.F20, etc.
IF YOU ARE INTERESTED IN OSCAR AND SPACECRAFT TELEMETRY, THEN THIS
PROGRAM IS A MUST.
4.0 ELMER 1.00
ELMER is an Expert System Based on a Finite State Machine. There
are two versions of ELMER supplied with LAN-LINK. One is built in
for use in packet mode communications, when connected to someone
else. The second version is a stand alone version for use in
developing the text files and the logic. The stand alone version
lets you program and debug your own personal ELMER by yourself. The
stand alone version is a separate product and requires separate
registration.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 179
Appendix 11 How Shareware Works
The Association of Shareware Professionals (ASP) has established
standards for its members and for any organization which has "ASP
Approved" status. The ASP wants to make sure the shareware principle
works for you. If you are unable to resolve a problem with an ASP
member or organization (other than technical support), the ASP may
be able to help. Please write to
The ASP Ombudsman, 545 Grover Road,
Muskegon, MI. 49442-9427, USA.
You are encouraged to copy the floppy disk and share it freely with
others. You have the luxury of trying out the product at your own
pace and in the comfort of your own home or workplace.
After you have used the material for a reasonable evaluation period
(30 days), you should either discontinue use of the material or
register your copy. Your support is important and greatly
appreciated. With it, Shareware authors are encouraged to design and
distribute new products. Without it, a great deal of high quality,
low cost software will cease to be available.
Why pay at all?
You receive support from the author. You receive a CURRENT copy of
the program. Your input and ideas help shape future products. You
have a sense of pride and ownership in having honestly participated
in the Shareware revolution. You help to keep software prices down
by supporting a distribution method which doesn't depend on
expensive advertising campaigns.
Be aware of the following restrictions, designed to protect the
community of Shareware users and to prevent greedy people from
taking unfair advantage of the trust, hard work and good will of
Shareware authors.
1. No price or consideration may be charged for the material.
However, a distribution cost may be charged for the cost of the
diskettes, shipping and handling, not to exceed $6.
2. The files and programs on the disks may not be modified or
deleted.
3. The material cannot be sold as part of some other more
inclusive package.
4. The material cannot be "rented" or "leased" to others.
5. The end user must be told clearly in writing on the outside of
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 180
the package and in all advertising that the diskette(s) are
"Shareware."
6. The package must contain a written explanation that the disk is
for evaluation purposes, and that an additional "registration
fee" is expected by the author, if the material is used beyond
an initial evaluation period.
7. In the case of distribution via any telecommunications link,
the following must be done:
An error checking protocol must be used. The individual files
must be combined into, and transferred in a library or archive
format.
8. Shareware distribution is permitted only in the United States,
Canada, England, and Australia.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 181
Appendix 12 LAN-LINK 2.34 REGISTRATION FORM
PLEASE COPY this form and MAIL to
Software For Amateur Radio, P.O. BOX 3419, SILVER SPRING, MD 20918.
CALL ________________ TODAY'S DATE ________________
NAME ______________________________________________
ADDRESS ___________________________________________
___________________________________________________
CITY ______________________________________________
STATE _________ POSTCODE ____________ TNC TYPE_____ _________
FIRMWARE REV ____ HOME BBS ______________ DISK SIZE 5.25 ___3.5 ____
My favorite operating modes are __________________________________
Please register me as a user of LAN-LINK. I am currently using LAN-
LINK Version ______ which I obtained from _______. Please send me
the latest version of LAN-LINK or if a more recent one does not
exist at this time, QSL my registration and add my name to the list
to receive a free update when it becomes available.
I also enclose an additional amount for evaluation copies of ELMER
_, WHATS-UP _, PC-HAM _ and Startrek TCP _ ($5 for 1 program, $15.00
for the set). If I like them, I plan to register them in due course.
LAN-LINK Registration ($45.00) __.__
LAN-LINK manual/documentation on disk
(Word Perfect 5.1 format) ($10.00) __.__
ELMER Registration ($45.00) __.__
Evaluation software (as above) __.__
Basic Packet Radio ($29.95) __.__
Total Enclosed $__.__
Book shipping (overseas $10.00, US/Canada $3.75) __.__
Md. residents please add 5% sales tax __.__
Please enclose check drawn on a US Bank or postal money order in US
dollars. US banks charge up to $20.00 for processing a foreign
cheque. Canadian checks in US funds count as foreign, yet Postal
Money Orders from your local post office can be exchanged at any US
Post office without charge.
You many also use VISA/Mastercard if you wish. Please charge the
amount above to my VISA ___ Mastercard ____
Card Number __________________________________ Exp date ______
Signature ____________
Many additions come into LAN-LINK as a result of user suggestions,
so here's your chance to get some input in. Comments, likes,
dislikes, wish list, etc.
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 182
Index
Accessible, 137
AFSK, 83
Alarm, 5, 32, 44, 51, 96, 99, 163
Alarmwindow, 99, 163
Alert, 2, 4, 3, 4, 5, 11, 12, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23, 32, 39, 40, 41, 42,
43, 44, 76, 82, 96, 99, 122, 126, 127, 131, 133, 134, 150, 157, 168
ALFD, 103
Allowable, 69
Alpha-numerical, 69
Alt-A, 2, 21, 66
Alt-B, 2, 21
Alt-C, 2, 8, 19, 21, 67, 111
Alt-D, 2, 22, 49, 85, 106, 117, 150
Alt-E, 2, 19, 22, 67
Alt-F, 2, 22, 33, 55, 137
Alt-G, 2, 11, 23
Alt-H, 2, 23, 67
Alt-J, 2, 23
Alt-K, 2, 23, 40, 42
Alt-L, 2, 23, 88
Alt-M, 2, 15, 23, 86
Alt-N, 2, 23, 110
Alt-O, 2, 24, 78, 88
Alt-P, 3, 24, 68
Alt-Q, 3, 24, 37, 68
Alt-R, 3, 24
Alt-S, 3, 24, 67, 87
Alt-T, 3, 29
Alt-U, 67
Alt-W, 3, 24, 60, 146, 157
Alt-X, 3, 7, 24, 68
Alt-Y, 3, 10, 25
Alt-Z, 3, 25, 40
AMTOR, 2, 3, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 27, 29,
32, 33, 34, 43, 44, 51, 52, 55, 58, 62, 63, 81, 82, 84, 88, 91, 96,
100, 103, 104, 105, 106, 112, 113, 131, 137, 141, 146, 147, 150, 152,
157
AMTOR-FEC, 17
Announce, 122
Announcement, 4, 39, 42
Announcements, 11
Annunciator, 2, 4, 14, 122
Anomalies, 152
ANSI, 2, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 55, 156, 157
AO, 177
APLINK, 21, 96
Applicable, 168
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 183
APRS, 177
ARQ, 2, 20, 21, 22, 32, 103
ASCII, 5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 15, 17, 20, 27, 28, 46, 54, 57, 58, 59, 105,
115, 127, 128, 135, 136, 137, 138, 141, 142, 145, 156, 161, 169
ASP, 179
Attempt, 15, 21, 31, 43, 45, 52, 59, 78, 85, 89, 146, 150, 152, 177
Audio, 3, 5, 85, 87, 96, 178
Auto, 3, 4, 31, 36, 37, 39, 41, 43, 45, 102, 104, 117, 126, 129, 139,
157
AUTO-Upload, 136
AUTOCQ, 14, 16, 17, 103
AutoCR, 94
Autoexec, 170
Bank, 181
Battery, 7, 8, 74, 75
BAUDOT, 2, 3, 5, 10, 17, 20, 27, 28, 45, 55, 73, 84, 102, 105, 113,
126, 131, 137
BBS, 1, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 23, 25, 26, 29, 39, 45, 48, 49, 50, 71, 75,
102, 124, 126, 130, 136, 140, 142, 143, 150, 154, 155, 157, 169, 170,
171, 173, 174, 181
BottomWindow, 99, 163
Bragtape, 88, 103
Broadcast, 42
BTB's, 16
BTEXT, 14, 85
Bulletin, 6, 17, 75, 90, 101, 125, 141
Bureau, 62, 69, 70
Bureaus, 69
Bus, 157
Callsigns, 31, 66, 67, 79, 80, 81, 87, 91, 138, 147, 152
Canadian, 181
Capture-to-disk, 4, 5, 10, 16, 17, 28, 30, 46, 48, 49, 50, 53, 54, 55,
77, 78, 80, 81, 89, 92, 101, 115, 116, 125, 130, 134, 151, 157, 177
Cations, 86
CFROM, 94, 119
Checked, 11
Checkmark, 11
Cheque, 181
Chime, 87
Chirpcopy, 5, 33, 106
Cleaned, 157
Client-server, 14
CLOCK, 5, 9, 36, 51, 52, 73, 74, 80, 83, 88, 97, 152, 153, 178
Cluster, 4, 10, 11, 25, 39, 41, 43, 96, 102, 126, 131
CMSG, 79, 80, 81, 94
Colon, 155
Color, 2, 5, 11, 12, 13, 19, 20, 21, 26, 27, 40, 44, 53, 55, 96, 98,
99, 100, 101, 109, 126, 131, 156, 157, 163, 178
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 184
COMMENTS, 62, 63, 66, 67, 134, 136, 173, 181
Communi, 86
Compares, 133
CONFIG, 124, 135, 174
Connect, 2, 3, 5, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 15, 16, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
31, 32, 36, 37, 43, 44, 45, 51, 52, 54, 59, 63, 73, 74, 76, 77, 78,
80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86, 89, 93, 94, 102, 103, 109, 110, 111, 119,
125, 128, 129, 135, 138, 140, 142, 143, 145, 146, 150, 153, 157, 177
CONOK, 80, 94, 119
Contest, 6, 4, 5, 11, 17, 24, 41, 51, 52, 55, 63, 64, 81, 87, 88, 128,
157, 176
Control-C, 46
Control-F, 137
Control-Q, 154
Control-S, 154
Control-Z, 3, 29, 58, 136, 140
Conv, 16
CONVERSE, 3, 2, 24, 33, 34, 58, 60, 74, 83, 84, 86, 111, 113, 142, 152,
157
CQ, 3, 4, 5, 4, 5, 12, 14, 17, 18, 19, 22, 31, 32, 33, 36, 37, 42, 43,
44, 45, 46, 50, 76, 78, 81, 93, 103, 108, 110, 112, 113, 115, 124,
125, 130, 139, 147, 149, 150, 152, 157
CQTEXT, 93
CR, 13, 102, 114
Ctdsk, 4, 5, 16, 46, 48, 53, 54, 81, 130
CTEXT, 5, 73, 75, 79, 80, 81, 124, 127, 139, 142, 157
Customize, 7, 11, 45, 50, 90, 94, 96, 97, 119, 139, 145
CW, 4, 9, 20, 28, 39, 41, 42, 83, 84, 96, 105, 106, 112, 113, 114, 115,
116, 117, 122, 126, 130, 131, 134, 137, 151, 157
CWID, 113
Damage, 65
Date-time-text, 29, 60, 148
Daytime, 178
DBASE, 4, 9, 62, 63, 64, 65, 67, 134, 176
DCD, 81, 88, 111, 125, 150, 151, 153, 154
DCD-Flag, 153
DCDCONN, 111
Debug, 41, 102, 158, 178
DEmo, 5, 6, 46, 50, 57, 60, 61, 139, 157
Demonstration, 139
Demonstrations, 139
Deprived, 12
DIGICALL, 12
Digipeat, 4, 5, 12, 18, 24, 78, 81, 83, 91, 109, 134, 142, 150
Digipeater, 86, 91, 94, 119
Directory, 4, 5, 4, 14, 21, 43, 44, 48, 50, 53, 54, 56, 71, 86, 92,
125, 127, 134, 142, 162, 169, 171
Directs, 131
Disc, 16
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 185
Disconnect, 2, 3, 5, 14, 19, 20, 22, 23, 27, 30, 32, 33, 74, 81, 85,
86, 89, 90, 93, 103, 112, 129, 130, 141, 153, 157
DMO, 5, 46, 50, 124, 139
Dollars, 181
Double, 155
Downlink, 76
Download, 3, 4, 10, 14, 25, 26, 27, 39, 40, 58, 59, 92, 93, 113, 125,
136, 141, 142, 144, 145, 148, 169
Dropouts, 129
DSP, 6, 2, 8, 20, 61, 83, 107, 126, 131, 132, 151, 157
DSZ, 168, 174
Dual, 4, 6, 42, 57, 61, 126, 131, 151, 157
DUPLEX, 3, 76
Duplicates, 87
DWAIT, 150
DX-alert, 12, 20, 40
DX-pedition, 5, 77, 78, 82
Dynamic, 12
Dynamically, 88
Early, 150
Echo, 30, 32, 81, 84, 85, 99, 134, 150
Echo-As-Sent, 150
Editor, 4, 9, 12, 14, 15, 30, 46, 48, 53, 71, 79, 112, 127, 135, 145,
161, 162, 166
Elapsed, 177
ELMER, 4, 18, 36, 120, 121, 124, 125, 127, 128, 139, 157, 158, 159,
161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 178, 181
Ended, 83
Ensures, 83
EOF, 29, 48, 58, 136, 140, 147
Epson, 69
Equipped, 122
EVENT, 5, 4, 23, 26, 32, 36, 51, 52, 62, 74, 77, 82, 89, 91, 112, 141,
145, 148, 157
Exp, 181
Expand, 5, 53, 55, 125, 128
Eyeball, 177
Faked, 83
FEC, 3, 5, 22, 24, 32, 33, 34, 44, 113, 152
FF, 39
Figures, 1
FlagOperation, 164
Flashing, 16, 17, 18, 19, 28, 44, 78, 82, 87, 101
FRACK, 150
Fromutome, 157
FSK, 28, 83
Fuji, 126, 132
Fuji-OSCAR, 76, 177
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 186
FULLDUPLEX, 76
Funds, 181
G-TOR, 24, 107, 137, 157
Garbage, 129, 154
Gateway, 147
Grab, 2, 11, 20, 23
Greek, 7, 97, 154
Header, 4, 26, 44, 72, 77, 89, 99, 112, 141, 146, 149, 150, 175
HEADERLN, 134
Hearing, 42
Huffman, 117, 118
Icom, 132, 133, 157
Inactive, 33
Incoming, 3, 4, 5, 4, 5, 8, 11, 15, 16, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 33, 34,
40, 43, 46, 48, 49, 50, 55, 60, 61, 70, 71, 74, 75, 78, 80, 82, 84,
85, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102, 103, 104, 107, 111, 115, 116, 117, 128,
129, 131, 134, 138, 139, 150, 152, 154, 158, 165
Incomparability, 156
Interrogated, 122
Inwindow, 86, 98, 109, 163
Inwindows, 57
IRQ, 97, 125, 127, 172
KA-Node, 4, 22, 134, 135
KAM, 2, 8, 29, 33, 76, 83, 84, 88, 91, 95, 97, 103, 105, 107, 108, 110,
114, 116, 117, 128, 130, 134, 150, 152, 154, 155, 156, 157
KM, 102, 130
KN, 27, 88
KPC, 2, 74, 149
Labels, 69, 70
LANLINK, 88
LF, 13, 102, 114
LFADD, 84
Live, 12
LM, 25, 130, 136, 137
Log-to-disk, 80
Logcheck, 11
LogWindow, 98
Mail-Snatch, 26, 90, 150
Marks, 134
MARS, 6, 17, 102, 113, 114, 157
MBX, 8, 59, 119, 124, 135, 136, 146
MCON, 108
Memories, 177
Metabeacon, 45, 79, 80, 112
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 187
Meter, 11
MFILTER, 154, 155
MFJ, 2, 8, 33, 73, 76, 83, 84, 91, 97, 103, 105, 130, 149, 150, 157
MH, 3, 31, 60, 80, 98, 142, 146, 149, 150, 157
MHlist, 16
MHwindow, 31, 98
Milliseconds, 132
MIR, 5, 76, 77, 78, 177
Mission, 177
Modules, 62
MRPT, 44
Multi-connect, 4, 33, 74, 110, 154
Multi-mode, 2, 6, 130
Multi-stream, 23
Multi-user, 26, 45, 109
Multiconnect, 21, 100, 101, 111, 149
MYCALL, 113, 115, 116
NAVTEX, 17, 105, 107, 157
Needing, 61
NET, 4, 22, 134, 135, 137, 154
NNNN, 103, 114, 115, 116
Node, 2, 8, 10, 81, 84, 85, 125, 130
Non-packet, 45, 61, 139
Not-so-compatible, 154
Notation, 62
NTS, 45
Off-the-air, 61
Office, 181
Older, 177
One-up, 69
Orders, 181
Outwindow, 53, 98, 152, 163
Overseas, 181
PacketCluster, 2, 3, 4, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 18, 20, 23, 25, 29, 36,
39, 40, 41, 42, 91, 96, 107, 122, 125, 126, 128, 131, 133, 157
PacketClusters, 12
Pactor, 4, 5, 10, 12, 24, 27, 45, 55, 63, 103, 105, 106, 117, 137, 151,
156, 157
Parallel, 177
Parameter, 6, 12, 13, 24, 27, 32, 36, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 65, 66, 76,
78, 81, 83, 84, 85, 89, 91, 94, 95, 96, 97, 99, 101, 103, 104, 106,
113, 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 134, 152, 153, 155, 156, 157, 178
Path, 4, 8, 22, 24, 43, 44, 59, 63, 85, 86, 89, 92, 108, 125, 135, 138,
141, 142, 143, 162, 168
PC² , 174
Pcz, 138, 144, 145, 155, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174
PCZDIR, 171
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 188
PCZPORT, 169, 171, 172
PCZSPEED, 169, 171
Perfect, 181
PgDn, 47, 50, 66, 68, 71
PgUp, 3, 27, 46, 66, 68
Phrase, 165
Pictures, 12
Post, 12, 181
Postcards, 69
Prematurely, 83
Presupposes, 83
Printer, 3, 16, 20, 24, 65, 68, 69, 81, 85, 86, 126, 129, 157, 169
PromptWindow, 98, 163
PSK, 132
QBM, 5, 57, 58, 92, 125, 141, 142, 145, 146
QBU, 5, 57, 92, 93, 125, 137, 145, 147
QBU-RX, 57, 93, 124, 125, 137, 145
QBU-TX, 57, 92, 124, 125, 137, 145
QDB, 5, 57, 58, 59, 102, 142, 145
QIC, 5, 57, 60, 126, 131, 148, 157
QIX, 150
QJG, 59, 147
QMH, 5, 4, 57, 60, 142, 143, 146, 149, 157
QNO, 58, 87, 102, 141, 146, 147
QQQ, 103
QRA, 3, 5, 20, 24, 60, 146
QRM, 2, 32, 77, 82, 146
QRT, 18, 60, 77, 82, 94, 119, 146, 147, 148
QRU, 5, 57, 59, 103, 135, 146, 147
QRV, 57, 58, 102, 140, 147
QRX, 60, 148
QRZ, 3, 20, 24, 37, 79, 80
QSL, 4, 58, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 77, 79, 80, 102, 141, 147, 157,
181
QSL'd, 96
QSLd, 11
QSM, 5, 15, 57, 58, 138, 146
QSO, 3, 4, 14, 17, 19, 23, 24, 30, 33, 52, 55, 56, 80, 81, 82, 87, 88,
103, 106, 109, 113, 115, 120, 124, 139, 152, 157, 158, 162, 164, 165,
166
QSP, 5, 18, 57, 58, 60, 81, 87, 124, 136, 140, 146, 147
QSY, 3, 12, 77, 82, 122, 126, 133
QTA, 5, 57, 59, 124, 138, 141, 147
QTC, 4, 14, 15, 17, 18, 81, 82, 85, 86, 90, 102, 125, 147, 155, 157
QTC-Snatch, 15, 86, 150
QTR, 5, 57, 60, 148, 157
QZD, 5, 57, 59, 138, 144, 145, 148
QZD-RX, 138, 144
QZD-TX, 138, 144
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 189
QZU, 5, 57, 60, 138, 144, 145, 148
QZU-RX, 138, 144
QZU-TX, 138, 144
Radio, 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 11, 12, 14, 28, 36, 41, 42, 53, 61, 75, 76, 78,
84, 103, 105, 119, 122, 123, 126, 132, 133, 138, 140, 143, 144, 145,
150, 157, 158, 161, 176, 177, 181
Random, 27, 131
Re-index, 6, 63, 65, 69, 155
Receive-Disconnect, 3
Repeated, 12
Results, 11
Retry, 3, 20, 22, 24, 76
Reverse, 13, 28, 146, 173
Robot, 2, 5, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 24, 51, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 84, 112,
113, 157, 176
Robot-Mailbox, 32
RTTY, 3, 5, 6, 17, 25, 27, 29, 32, 83, 105, 115, 126, 131, 132, 150
RY, 3, 25, 170, 175
SAREX, 5, 18, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 101, 125, 177
Schematic, 177
Scrollback, 3, 11, 27, 28, 98
Searching, 39
Seemed, 84
SELCAL, 5, 6, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 33, 43, 44, 91, 103, 114, 115,
116, 124
Separated, 133
Separates, 131
Sequence, 3, 8, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 27, 29, 31, 32,
33, 37, 42, 46, 57, 58, 59, 60, 70, 78, 81, 82, 83, 85, 89, 90, 91,
98, 102, 103, 104, 108, 113, 114, 115, 116, 125, 136, 140, 141, 143,
147, 148, 152, 161, 164
Served, 12
Sighting, 177
Simulate, 60
Simultaneous, 132
Solar, 177
SOLO, 18, 84, 94, 108, 109, 130
Sorry, 156
Speak, 122, 123
Spotted, 107
SSID, 91, 138, 155
State-sequence, 102
StatusWindow, 98
Staying, 83
Stays, 157
Step, 177
STReamsw, 156
Stuck, 69
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
LAN-LINK Version 2.34 Page 190
Subject, 6, 26, 48, 90, 102, 125, 154
Suggests, 150
Sunlight, 177
Supply, 122
Synchronizing, 177
Target, 4, 5, 17, 19, 43, 44, 82
Telescope, 177
TheNet, 134
There's, 177
Therein, 107
Timeout, 93, 125, 128, 157
Transparent, 21, 33, 57, 58
Tunes, 133
UNP, 12
Unproto, 78, 80, 110
Unshift, 17, 114
Untested, 157
Upgrade, 10, 157
Uplink, 76
USB, 122
Verbose, 90
Vfo, 42, 122
Visible, 177
Wise, 42
Wordperfect, 1
XFLOW, 9, 154
XMIT, 116
XMITOK, 9, 84, 106, 157
Xmodem, 4, 39, 40, 143, 144, 168, 170, 174, 175
XOFF, 172
XON, 172
YAPP, 135, 143
Ymodem, 4, 39, 40, 144, 168, 170, 175
Zap, 3, 4, 5, 17, 18, 20, 25, 26, 27, 39, 40, 43, 45, 48, 49, 51, 52,
75, 76, 77, 78, 81, 83, 89, 90, 101, 103, 104, 154, 157
Zmodem, 5, 59, 60, 138, 139, 144, 145, 148, 155, 168, 169, 170, 172,
175
COPYRIGHT Joe Kasser, G3ZCZ 1996.
